一去二三里课件

一去二三里课件收藏13篇。

老师会对课本中的主要教学内容整理到教案课件中，因此就需要老师自己花点时间去写。 学生反应可以帮助教师做出更有效的课堂管理决策，好的教案课件需要注意哪些方面呢？请欣赏我们为大家整理的“一去二三里课件”，欢迎您来参考并充分阅读这篇文章！

一去二三里课件(篇1)

我说课的内容是人教版课标教材一年级识字教学的第一篇课文《一去二三里》。这是一首古代童谣，它向我们展示了一幅宁静而幽远的乡村美景。这首童谣排列整齐，朗朗上口，充满儿童情趣，具有韵律美，是进行朗读训练的好项目培养儿童通过朗读感受童谣中所表现的优美景色。同时，本课是识字教学第一课，是学生由拼音拼读过程进入汉字读写的第一课，要培养儿童养成正确的写字姿势和良好的写字习惯，书写规范、端正、整洁，同时培养儿童学习汉语言文字的兴趣。

本文是一首古代童谣，它向我们呈现了一幅郊外的美景：在不远的地方，有一个小山村，炊烟袅袅，住着几户人家。山村里几座亭台错落有致地排列着，树上、路边盛开着各种美丽的花。这首童谣巧妙地把一至十的数字镶嵌其中。

本课有两幅图，图一描绘了小山村的景象，表现了童谣的意境，图二用十个运动员和十个篮球帮助学生识记十个表示数字的汉字。

本课的指导思想：根据《语文课程标准》的要求，围绕语文教学的基本目标，积极倡导自主、合作、探究的学习方式，努力创设开放，有活力的学习氛围，使学生的语文素养得到全面提高。根据低年级学生的认知特点，我在识字教学中多采用游戏活动为主。阅读教学多遵循学生的个性化行为，应让学生在积极主动的思维和情感中得到审美感受。

预设学习目标：

1、自主学习，认识十二个生字。区分“四”和“十”。

2、感知课文内容，知道学生正确、流利、有感情地朗读童谣，体会诗的意境，感受乡村的宁静美丽。

教学重点：识字，感悟朗读。

一去二三里课件(篇2)

【教材简说】

课文是一首古代童谣，他向我们呈现了一幅郊外的美景在不远的地方，有一个小山村，炊烟袅袅，住着几户人家。山里几座亭台错落有致的排列着，树上、路边盛开着各种美丽的花。这首童谣巧妙的把一至十的数字镶嵌其中。

本课有两幅图。图一描绘了小山村的景象，表现了童谣的意境。图二用十个运动员和十个球帮助学生识记十个表示数字的汉字。

本课教学重点是认字和写字，难点是分辨“八”和“入”。

【学习目标】

１、认识１２个字，会写３个字。认识笔画“一”。

２、正确、流利、稍带感情的朗读课文。

３、初步感受童谣中所表现的景色美。

【教学流程】

一、谈话激趣

师今天，我们用学会的汉语拼音本领去学习汉字和文章，你们有兴趣吗？

二、借助拼音，初读感知

１、请小朋友打开课文，自己拼拼拼音，读读这首诗。

２、这首诗中有哪些数字？用铅笔圈出来，拼拼拼音读准他。

３、出示生字卡片齐读、指名读、小老师领读、开火车读。

４、我们把生字宝宝送回诗中再读一读，自由读诗歌。

５、读给你的同桌听一听，或者同桌一起读一读。

６、指名读请会读一句的小朋友读一读，请会读两句的小朋友读一读，请全都会读的小朋友读一读：

师读着读着，你仿佛看见了什么？（生自由说）

三、借助画面，再读感悟

１、出示课文插图，刚才脑子里看到这幅画的小朋友请起立，掌声表扬自己。你们不仅会读课文，而且读懂了课文，多能干呀！

２、看图。师中国有句话是“诗中有画，画中有诗”。你们能读着诗看到画，能不能看着画读出诗呢？

老师指着行走的孩子学生读“一去二三里”。

老师指着炊烟袅袅的房屋学生读“烟村四五家”。

老师指着亭子学生读“亭台六七座”。

老师指着路边的花学生读“八九十枝花”。

老师指着整幅画学生读整首诗。

３、情趣练读，读出节奏感：

老师以什么样的速度读前一句，学生也以什么样的速度读后一句。

一学生以什么样的速度读前一句，另一学生也以什么样的速度读后一句。

４、当小诗人有感情的读一读。试背。

四、巩固生字

１、巩固字音“你拍一，我拍一”的游戏。

２、巩固字形和生字说再见的游戏。（读卡片）

一去二三里课件(篇3)

【教学目标】

１、认识１０个生字，有感情朗读诗歌。

２、图文结合，大体了解诗歌的意思，体会山村的优美和生活的快乐。

３、初步认识田字格，学会写“一”。

【教学准备】

课件、卡片、生字果。

【教学过程】

一、 以情激趣，导入新课

１、嗨！大家好！我是你们的老朋友“手指娃娃”，好久不见，想我了吗？今天，我给大家带来了漂亮的礼物，是什么呢？（出示生字果）草莓，高兴吗？草莓果上的拼音我们肯定知道读是吗？自己拼一拼、开火车读。

２、这里面有十个数字娃娃，我们把它们叫出来见一下面好吗？指名读。这十个数字娃娃和两个生字娃娃就是我们这节课要学的内容。

二、自主研读，自读自悟

１、初读课文，认识生字：

⑴ 手指娃娃：今天我要请小朋友到我家去作客，我的家在一座小山村里，离这儿不远。我们出发吧。（出示图片。）

⑵ 指导看图说图意：

① 你来到了什么地方？你是怎么知道的？

② 这是离我们不远的一个小山村，只要走上二三里路就可以到达，（出示图）首先看远处有哪些景物？（房屋＼袅袅的炊烟） ［你能说得更好吗？］

③ 再看房屋背后的小山上有什么？（亭子）亭子也叫亭台，一起说一遍“亭台”。

④ 我们再往近处看，近处有那些景物？花儿多吗？能数得清吗？（蓝蓝的天空＼开得正艳的桃花＼无忧无虑，快乐飞舞的小鸟）

在一座美丽的小山村里，住着几户人家，山里有几座亭台，树上、路边盛开着盛开着各种鲜花。

⑶ 手指娃娃的家乡美吗？古时候有位诗人也觉得这里很美，就把这里的美景写成了一首诗。（师范读古诗）你们想读一读吗？

⑷ 请小朋友打开书，咱们一起来做两件事儿，看谁的小耳朵听得最清楚：先做第一件事儿，请你找出生字果上的这十二个汉字娃娃，用圆圈圈出来，大声地读一读。

⑸ 会读了吗？谁能读给手指娃娃听呀？

⑹ 指名读，评议正音：

（有两个数字宝宝的名字不太容易区分，稍不注意就会喊错，你知道它们是谁吗？（四和十）请找出四和十，你能区分吗？还有哪个字是平舌呢？哪个是特别韵母的生字？“六”正音找出来读一读。“一”的本音读“yī”，但在词语或句子中会变音，有时读二声，如“一块地”、“一片海”；有时读四声，如“一棵树”、“一朵花”。本课读二声。）

齐读。

⑺ 遮上拼音，打乱次序，你还认得它吗？

２、第二件事儿，请小朋友借助拼音大声读一读这首诗，不过老师有个小小的要求，不能跟着人家一起读，做得到吗？看谁练习得最认真，开始。读好了，读给你的同桌听：

⑴ 请四个小朋友一人读一句。

⑵ 他们读得真好，我们一起试试吧。一组读一句。

⑶ 让我们大家一起读一读吧。（读古诗）。一边读，一边想象那美丽的小山村。

⑷ 分组赛读。

⑸ 小朋友读得那么好，老师仿佛看到了在不远的地方，有一个小山村，炊烟袅袅，住着几户人家，山里有几座亭台，树上，路边盛开着各种美丽的花。让我们再一起夸一夸手指娃娃的家乡，能背的可以背诵，如果能加上动作就更棒了！

三、复习巩固，指导写字

１、小朋友学得这么热闹，引来了村里的一群小企鹅，胖乎乎的，真可爱！哇，这么多，我们一起数一数。（１～１０）他们好象在找什么呀？你能帮他们找到自己的球吗？

２、在小朋友的帮助下小企鹅找到了自己的球我们一起给小企鹅报一下数好吗？

３、哇！瞧，他们可高兴了，球赛快开始了，让我们和小企鹅一起做准备动作吧。（课中休息：音乐）

４、手指娃娃送来的生字果子，谁能读得又准确又响亮，并能给这些生字找一个朋友，就把果子送给他！（抢读生字）

带读

５、手指娃娃的礼物送完了，现在我们也给她准备点礼物，好吗？送什么好呢？就写个：“一”字吧！看！这是什么格子？出示“田字格”跟着老师读：“田字格，四方方，写好汉字它帮忙。左上格，右上格，左下格，右下格，横中线，竖中线，各个方位记心间。”一的笔画是横，指导写“一”：一字只有一画，从左到右起笔稍重，收笔时向右稍按一下。写在横中线上左右的长度相等。书空，书上写两个。

四、总结全课

１、今天，小朋友们和老师一起，认识了十二个汉字娃娃，学会了一首非常好听的古诗，还参观了手指娃娃的家乡，喜欢吗？现在，我们要离开了，可是，那美丽的景色还深深留在我们的脑海里，让我们再一次朗诵古诗，表达我们喜爱之情，好吗？

２、手指娃娃可满意了，她希望同学们课后找一找，我们周围哪些地方用上了这一课的生字，下节课交流。再见！

【教学反思】

三个组教学片断集中展示了充满活力、开放的课程环境，使我深刻地体验到：教师在课改的舞台上正扮演着十分重要的角色，教师对新课程的理解是决定新课程实验成败的前提。新课程所倡导的民主、开放、合作、探索的课堂生活方式，正是走进学生心灵、宏扬学生个性的金钥匙。

一、以生为本，建立新型的师生关系，构建充满活力的语文课堂

在本案例中，教师始终站在学生平等的地位，与学生平等对话。如：以“趣味对读”中，教师以商讨的语气提出“你想怎样对读呢”，在听到学生独特的想法，教师马上予以支持，并提出“你们想怎样读就怎样读！”，在这里，教师亦师亦友，只在课堂中引路，把“怎样走路”的权利还给学生。

更值得一提的是在“续编课文”中，教师融入学生中，“别忘了，有问题找老师，老师也是你们的小组成员哦”，老师与学生平等对话，与同学们共同思考、共同体验成功的快乐，师生的和谐互动，充分体现了课堂民主和人文关怀，这正是构建充满活力的课堂的人文基础。

二、营造富有情趣的课堂气氛，满足学生个性心理的需求，构造充满活力的语文课程

正如苏霍姆林斯基所说：“一个教师不能无视学生的情感生活，因为那是学习中主动性和创造性力的源泉”。只有满足了儿童的情感需求，才能让儿童真正成为主人，投入学习。在案例中，教师在开课之时，便精心营造了“小动物比尾巴”的情境，并鼓动学生当评委，面对栩栩如生的图片，学生争先恐后的发言；而后老师又引导学生进行“趣味对读”，并鼓励学生选择自己喜欢的方式一对一地朗读。“读我所爱读，快乐无比”；最后教师进一步激发学生情趣，“咱们也来当一回作家，续写课文，学着课文的样子，自己写儿歌”，学生兴致盎然，并迅速在小组内讨论起来。在宽松的气氛中，学生交流、合作、互助、成功。在充满活力的课堂上，学生体验着读的愉悦、交往的愉悦、探索的愉悦、成功的愉悦，语文，真正走进了学生心灵，学生丰富的个性在课堂上展现无遗。

三、教师要捧着一颗爱心，带着一颗童心，让所有的学生全员参与，全程参与充满活力的语文课程

新课程改革处处体现着以人为本的人文思想，我们的课堂应该像春天一样，让所有的孩子像百花一样灿烂地绽放。在本案例中，教师所引领的每一个教学活动都是基于全体学生，教师不是导演，胜似导演，每一个教学环节都充满着童趣，充满着人文关怀；学生不是演员，胜似演员，全员参与，全程参与了每一个教学环节。

如果每个教师都捧着一颗爱心，带着一颗童心，唤起儿童个性心理的需求，我相信，那一定能建设开放而有活力的语文课程，让学生在语文的大课堂里幸福成长。

一去二三里课件(篇4)

一去二三里

第一课时

一、激情导入

1、导入新课：到今天为止，我们已经学完了拼音，你们想不想展示一下自己的本领？我没看看谁的本领最大。

2、点击课件出示：san wu yi liu ba shi er si qi jiu（注意“十”和“四”的区别，翘舌音、平舌音）

3、开火车读一读，（哪列火车开起来？）看谁拼得最准，最快。

二、研读、识字

1、师：你们学得这么棒，我要奖励你们，今天老师要带你们一起来学一学与数字有关的古诗。

2、课件出示古诗。并让孩子们把书本打开，翻到44页，自由读书中的古诗，在读古诗中认识生字。要求：用手指着读，不认识的字请教拼音朋友，也可以问同学、老师。（教师巡视、指导）

3、老师读课文后面要求认读的生12个生字，学生用笔在书上圈出生字。

4、把圈出的生字读给同桌听。

5、识记生字：不看课文，这些生字还认识吗？

（1）出示带拼音的十二个生字卡片：指名读，开火车读。（重点引导读准“四”

“十”“三”）

（2）变换抽取十二个生字（不带拼音），用各种方式读。

（3）小朋友有没有发现，在我们读的这些生字中，数字占了大多说，那么老师想考考大家，在我们的生活中，有用到过这些数字吗？给他们找一找朋友，组一组词，说一说。（4）我们的“去”和“里”在一边可着急了，也想让你们给他们找找朋友。给“去”和“里”找找朋友。

6、在这篇课文中，除了老师刚才提到的生字，你还认识哪些生字呢？（出示课件，让学生一起来读一读）注意平翘舌，结合书本图片，用手指出“村”“亭“花“。

课间操（小手绕一绕，小手顶一顶，小手勾一勾，小手握一握，小手放放好）

三、借助画面，了解古诗

过渡：小朋友们不仅读得好，而且课间操做得也很棒，你们表现都这么好，老师决定带你们去小山村欣赏风景，你们想不想去呀？（想）

1、出示课文插图，让孩子们说一说，自己在图中看到了什么。(要求学生说完整句，大声说，如果看到了树，看到了一棵树，看到了一棵茂盛的大树。说得好的，及时表扬)

2、古时候有位诗人也看到了风景，而且觉得这里的风景特别漂亮，就把这里的美景写成了一首诗，刚才我们在学习生字的时候已经和它见过面了，现在我们一起把刚才学过的生字放入古诗中来读一读。（注意节奏、有拖音现象的要及时纠正）

1、老师刚才在竖着耳朵听你们的朗读，在你们读的时候老师发现这首诗里写了好多美景，不知道你们有没有发现。给你们一分钟时间，同桌一起合作，读一读，找一找。

2、学生说一说自己是读哪一行诗看到的。（学生可能很容易找到：“八九十枝花”但“亭台”和“烟村”如果找不出来时，要适时引导。）

3、刚才小朋友们在古诗中找到的美景深深地吸引了老师，老师也忍不住陶醉在其中。让我们一起带着愉悦的心情踏入小山村吧！

4、(出示第一、二句)

(1)(出示画面)一眼望去，二三里路远的地方，你看到了什么?(几座房子)在这个静静的小山村里，住着几户人家，每到傍晚时分小山村的烟囱里就会飘出袅袅炊烟，这就是“烟村”。

(2)谁愿意把第一、二句读给大家听听?(指名读)

(3)没走多远，就看到了美丽的小山村，多轻松啊。村子不大，只有几户人家。谁愿意带着这种美美的心情再来读读第一、二句?(指名读，齐读)

5、(出示第三、四句)

(1)(出示画面)快看，远处的小山上有什么?(亭子)亭子也叫“亭台”。（近处，有什么?(开得正艳的花朵)在小山村的周围有许多大山，人们在山里建了好几座亭子，旁边的树上、路上开满了各种颜色的花儿，可漂亮了！

(2)谁愿意把你看到的美丽景色介绍给大家，愿意的请竖起书本来读一读。(自由读，指名读，分男女生读)

(3)村子四周的景色这么美，我们一起美美地读读吧。(齐读)

6、同桌的两个同学合作，一个读第一、二句，一个读第三、四句，看谁读得最有感情。

7、谁能有感情地朗读整首诗?大家闭上眼睛认真听，看他能把你带到那美丽的地方吗?(指名读全诗，在评议中进一步感悟山村的秀美，激发学生的情感。)

师：请同学找找“亭台”和“烟村”，借助图画认识“亭台”和“烟村”。

8、总结：小朋友们说得真好，老师仿佛看到了在不远的地方，有一个小山村，炊烟袅袅，住着几户人家，山里有几座亭子错落有致地排列着，树上、路边开着各种美丽的花。这么美丽的花。这么美丽的地方，离我们不太远，诗中说——就走二三里路就到了。（一里相当于从教室到校门口走一个来回）。

9、指导学生有感情地朗读课文，边读边想。

10、背古诗，边背边想象诗中的景色。巩固生字

1、师：刚才同学们已经和这些生字见过面了，没有拼音时你能认出来吗？

2、点击课件，出示不带拼音的认读字：一

去

二

三

里

四

五

六

七 八

九

十

。（去：从这里走出去的意思。烟村：翠烟绕绕的样子、亭台：供游人观赏、休息的亭子）

3、指名读生字卡片“一”到“十”。

4、再现生字：让学生填一填课件中的数字。

5、四、指导书写

过渡：生字我们认识了，那接下来我们要把这些汉字也送回家，那汉字的家又在哪里呢？ 1.（点击课件，出示田字格）这就是汉字的家。我们一起来认识下田字格。先让学生跟老师说一说“田字格”，老师进行课件演示。

2、学习新笔画：汉字是由一个个笔画组成的，今天我们来学习第一个新笔画。

（1）课件出示笔画名称héng（横），先让孩子们借助拼音认识笔画的名称，再让学生直呼笔画的名称。教师示范写，学生试着手指笔画一下，边写边说起笔位置，收笔位置。（2）学生边听边观察横在田字格中的位置。在孩子们动笔写之前，前强调一下写字姿势“还 2 记得老师以前教你们的儿歌吗？写字姿势要端正，身体坐正书放平，一寸一尺和一拳，学好知识身体棒！让老师看看，你们写字姿势有没有坐端正，胸离桌子要一拳哦。做的好的孩子要及时表扬。

（3）学生描红，练习书写。（4）接下来我们来学习写“二”，有哪位小朋友可以告诉大家，我们可以用什么方法记住“二”这个字呢？（可以和一比较），“二”的上面一横短，下面一横长。和一的写法相似，起笔位置收笔位置。观察、描红。

（5）“三”（谁来说说怎么样记住“三”呢？动笔写一写）写好后同桌评价，写对了吗？写得漂亮吗？如果好，好在哪里呢？起笔顿，中间轻，收笔顿有没有做到了？比一比哪位小朋友不仅做得端正，而且字写得漂亮。

（6）“去”笔画“横héng、竖shù、横héng、折zhé、点diǎn”

(7)“里”笔画“

1、竖shù

2、横折héng zhé

3、横héng（中间的）

4、横héng（封口的）

5、横

6、竖shù

7、横héng

3、展示优秀作业，进行表扬。

五、课堂小结 师：孩子们，今天我们学习了新笔画，还学习了书写汉字，你们又多了一项本领，会写字了，多高兴啊！那就让我们怀着高兴的心情再把古诗背一背吧！

一去二三里课件(篇5)

教学目标：

★会认12个生字。

★能正确流利地朗读课文。

★感受童谣中表现出来的景色美。

教学重点：

识字。

教学难点：

分辨“八”和“入”，“九”和“几”等容易混淆的字。

教学准备：

ppt课件、简笔画、生字卡

教学设计：

一、创设情境引入

1、今天老师带了十个字娃娃，他们想和一年级九班的孩子做朋友，瞧瞧，他们找谁呢?(师边发卡片边说：字娃娃选xx，因为他准备得最好;字娃娃找xx和xx，他们俩显得特别的高兴;字娃娃看准了xx、xx和xx，他们正耐心地等待着字娃娃……)

2、介绍十个字娃娃给学生认识。

3、学生把字娃娃送回家——把字贴在相对应的简笔画旁边。

4、字娃娃还想找你们玩，请你亲切地呼唤他们的名字，老师请出他们。(师依次贴在黑板上，并板书课题，读课题。)

二、识字——和字娃娃一起去郊游

(一)《去画中游玩》

1、观察画面，你看到了什么?快来告诉我们吧!(师随机完善板书，呈现一首欢快的'童谣。)

2、请出字娃娃“去”和“里”，回头再瞧瞧图中有趣的数字。

(二)《识字大闯关》

闯关前的准备：

1、自由把这首童谣读一读，用笔圈出黑板上老师贴的字娃娃。

2、课件出示带拼音的生字，请学生认一认，不认识的拼一拼他头上的拼音。

3、检查识字情况——“闯三关”。

a、第一关：除去拼音我会认(成功后得一个笑脸娃娃)

b、第二关：火眼金睛辨生字(成功后得一个笑脸娃娃)

c、第三关：我去提篮摘苹果(成功后得一个笑脸娃娃)

(在此环节中，教师要加以指导“三、四、十”音，辨认“八、六”等字的字形。总结学习方法。)

(三)愉快的比赛

1、师范读课文，教给学生读的方法。

2、生先跟老师读再自己读。

3、比赛读。(强调数词读重些，突出山村虽小，景色却很美。)

三、课外拓展——数字儿歌

游玩结束，字娃娃永远和聪明勇敢的你们在一起。

1、结合简笔画出示儿歌，跟老师学一学。

《量词歌》

一头牛，两匹马;

三条鱼，四只鸭;

五本书，六支笔;

七棵果树，八朵花;

九架飞机，十辆车;

用错量词出笑话。

2、欣赏《红叶飘飘》。

3、鼓励学生自编数字儿歌，送出美丽的画儿。

一去二三里课件(篇6)

一．揭示课题

从今天开始我们要借助汉语拼音来识字了．识了字我们就可以读书看报学到很多知识，大家高不高兴啊？这节课我们学习一首古诗，请一位小朋友读课题．（在齐读）

（过渡）要想知道这首诗到底写了什么？就跟着陈老师一起参观一个美丽的小山村．

１．（出示图）首先看远处有那些景物？（房屋＼袅袅的炊烟）

２．再看房屋背后的小山上有什么？（亭子）亭子也叫亭台，一起说一遍“亭台”

３．我们再往近处看，近处有那些景物？（蓝蓝的天空＼开得正艳的桃花＼无忧无虑，快乐飞舞的小鸟）

小结：炊烟袅绕的村庄，古朴美丽的亭台，艳丽芬芳的桃花，快乐飞舞的小鸟组成了一个幽静美丽的世外桃源．课文用一首诗把它描写了出来．你们想读吗？

（过渡）：要想读好读对就必须把音节读准

二．复习音节

１（出示课文音节）请一位同学们又快又准地找出其中的整体认读音节．（yi si wu shi zhi ）齐读一遍．

２（出示er ）你们认识这个由特殊韵母组成的音节吗？请 读，读时注意舌头由平到卷，领读．

３（出示ting san cun）你能分辨两组韵母有什么不同？请你读出他们的不同．请XX读，领读．

过渡：看来，同学们拼音学得都不错，陈老师真为你们感到自豪．

三．读课文

１．（出示课文拼音）下面陈老师要求把音节连起来拼成一句话，先请小朋友自己试一试．（少量时间自由读）

２．你读熟了吗？那位小朋友敢来试一试？请四位小朋友一人读一句．

３．他们读得真棒，我们一起来试试好吗？请第一小组读第一句，依次类推．准备好了吗？起――

４．（出示拼音加汉字）下面我要求你们联系拼音读课文，这有一定难度，但陈老师相信这么聪明的你们只要认真读肯定会读．我先请四个同学试试，每人读一句．

５．他们读的真好，我们一起来试一试．还是每一小组读一句．

６．（出示古诗）去掉拼音你还会读吗？先跟老师读一遍，读诗的时候要加入一些感情，想想刚才那副美丽的图画，看见标点稍微停顿，不能拖声拖调．（领读）

７．我们一起读一遍（齐读）

四．学生字

１．（课文显出生字）从今天开始我们要学习生字了，这篇古诗要求我们学会的生字是“一 二 三 四 五 六 七 八 九 十”读了这么多遍书有人肯定已经认识他们了．（出示卡片）我请小朋友带着大家看陈老师的卡片再拼读一遍．（请小朋友领读）

２．我折去拼音你们还会读吗？我们来开火车．（请两组小朋友）

３．我们重点来学习一 二 三，先看“一”一起读．你能用一组词或说个句子吗？

４．我们来学写“一”，“一”是由笔画“横”组成从左下格靠近横中线的地方起笔，向右横，当左右相等时在横中线上收笔，收笔要停顿．看陈老师写一个．跟我一起说．（边写边说）

看电脑老师给我们写一遍．

打开习字本（学生唱儿歌）试着描一个写一个．

５．我们再来学习“二”一起读．

你能用“二”说句话或组词吗？

二有个特点，第一笔比第二笔长．请小朋友仔细观察二的两笔住在田字格的那里？

你们说的很对，看老师写，（板书）（二也是由笔画横组成，第一笔横短应该写在横中线上面，第二笔横写在横中线的下面比较长．）

拿出手指跟着电脑老师写一遍．

在习字本上描一个写一个．

６．请 ＸＸ 读（出示三）齐读．

你能用“三”组词或说句话吗？

仔细观察一下这个字有什么特点？（“三”由三笔横组成，第一第二笔比第三笔短．）他们分别写在田字格的那里？

看老师写一遍，再看电脑老师写一遍．

在习字本上描一个写一个．

五．总结：

今天我们一起学习了古诗《一去二三里》和三个生字“一 二 三”同学们学得非常认真，我希望你们能以同样的态度上每一节课．

一去二三里课件(篇7)

1、理解古诗大意，体会古诗的意境。

2、能用自己的语言描述古诗的情景，发现古诗蕴含的数字规律。

一、欣赏图片。

――师：老师今天要带大家去一个非常幽静、美丽的地方。教师出示电子大书，请大家猜猜这是什么地方？（小山村）请大家说一说看到了什么？（画的内容比较多，引导由近处往远处看）

――鼓励幼儿说出看到的美丽景色。

二、学习古诗。

师：宋朝诗人邵康节，看到这幅美丽的景色也赞叹不已，于是写下了一首诗来赞美它。

――教师有感情地诵读古诗。

――请幼儿说一说自己对古诗的理解。

――教师逐句给幼儿解释古诗大意。重点理解词汇“烟村”“亭台”。

――教师带领幼儿有感情地诵读古诗。

三、绘画活动。

――请幼儿根据古诗的`大意，将这个美丽的小山村画下来。

可以先复习《我们一起跳房子》等含有数字的儿歌，然后再引入本次活动。

语言区：制作可以插入文字的古诗图片或图书，即让幼儿在适当位置插入1至10，然后念故事。

有条件的家长可以带孩子到有中国古代小镇特色的地方游玩，让幼儿增长见识、拓展视野。

《一去二三里》网络视频资料。古诗大意：诗人从别处走来，大概走了二三里路，看见前面有个小山村，有四五户人家，屋顶正冒着炊烟呢。远处还有六七座亭台，围绕着亭台有好多的鲜花，八、九、十数都数不过来。

邵雍(1011―1077)，北宋哲学家、易学家，有内圣外王之誉。汉族，字尧夫，谥号康节，自号安乐先生、伊川翁，后人称百源先生。其先范阳（今河北涿县）人，幼随父迁共城（今河南辉县），后定居洛阳。少有志，读书苏门山百源上。仁宗嘉v及神宗熙宁中，先后被召授官，皆不赴。创“先天学”，以为万物皆由“太极”演化而成。著有《观物篇》《先天图》《伊川击壤集》《皇极经世》《梅花诗》等。

一片二片三四片，五片六片七八片；

千片万片无数片，飞入梅花总不见。

一去二三里课件(篇8)

教材分析：

《一去二三里》是苏教版小学一年级上册教材中的一篇课文，是学生在学习完拼音之后，接触的第一篇课文。本课要求看图读韵文识字。课文是一首古诗，读起来朗朗上口，富有儿童情趣。课文配有插图，小桥、流水、烟村、亭台、桃花一幅幽静美丽的乡村田野画面。课文田字格中的范字，是本课要求学会的10个生字，标在田字格上方的是要学生认识的9种笔画。本课的重点是识字、写字和诵读。

教学理念：

凸显以人为本的教育思想，让学生成为课堂的主人。一切从学生实际出发，激发他们的兴趣，让他们在诵读课文和观察插图中认识生字，培养他们自主阅读、自主识字的能力，让学生在说说、读读中自主探究，取得收获。

教学目标：

1.学会本课十个生字。两条绿线内的五个字只识不写。认识9种笔画。

2.通过诵读，大体了解诗歌的意思，体会山村的幽美和生活的快乐。

教学流程：

（一）导入新课：

1.小朋友们今天真精神！我们一起去郊游，好吗？（生齐唱歌曲《我们一起去郊游》）

2.（出示课文插图，指导学生由远到近观察）看看郊外景色怎么样？我们先看看远处有哪些景物？（亭子）亭子也叫亭台。（出示卡片：亭台）亭子前面有什么呢？（房屋）你们瞧，房屋上面还冒着烟呢，老师觉得人们可能在做饭呢，对不对？煮饭的炊烟饶着整个村子，我们把这村子叫烟村。（出示卡片：烟村）再看近处有什么景物呢？（艳丽芬芳的桃花、快乐飞舞的小鸟）

（二）初读课文

1.多么美丽的景色啊！老师送给大家一首小诗（师配乐范读古诗）这首小诗美吗？你们想不想读呢？自己大声读课文，注意读准每个字的音。如果读不准，你就借助拼音朋友多拼几次，明白吗？（生配乐读古诗）

2.老师要把这颗小星星呀，送给我们班的***。因为他读书的时候，身子坐得直直的，头正正的，书啊，抓得稳稳的。读书姿势可好了！我们大家都应该向他学习。接下来呀，老师要请四个小朋友来读这首小诗。一人一句，其他小朋友呢，竖起小耳朵认真听，看他们是不是把字音读准了。好，开始！

3.咱们班的小朋友真棒！读的同学很认真，听的同学呢，也很仔细。现在请同学们快快做好，注意读书姿势。这次听清老师的要求：再读课文，把句子读通顺读连贯。自己读自己的。开始！

（三）识记生字

1.这次小朋友读得都不错。那接下来呀，再听老师的任务：看看课后生字，把每个字拼读两遍。

2.下面该老师检查你们认读生字的情况了。卡片上的字你会读就举手！（强调：一本身读一声，但和其他生字伙伴在一起的时候，就该读二声。这是一种变调现象，在我们以后的学习中还会接触到很多，这就是我们中国语言的奥妙之处）让我们把生字齐读两遍。

3.脱掉拼音小帽，你们还认识吗？我们开火车来读。抢读。

（四）配乐诵读课文，启发想象

1.小朋友们真棒！很快就认识了这么多生字宝宝。老师告诉大家一个好消息：和这些字宝宝交了朋友，我们再来读课文，一定觉得特别愉快。不过，老师提醒大家：我们要一边读，一边想这幅美丽的画。待会儿告诉大家：你仿佛看见了什么？听到了什么？闻到了什么？想到了什么？好，开始！

2.谁愿意把你刚才读课文的感受告诉大家呀！你是从课文哪句话体会到的？

3.大家的想象力真丰富！那谁愿意把这首诗完整的读一读？这么多同学呀！我们男女生进行比赛，怎么样？读得真美！老师觉得我仿佛已经来到了这个幽静而美丽的小山村。

（五）书写汉字

1.认识田字格

同学们，我们是中国人，不但要会认中国汉字，还要会写中国汉字。中国汉字是方块字。拼音的家在四线格里，汉字的家就在中国的这块土地上。让我们一起去看看汉字的家吧。

这个方方正正的格子叫田字格。咱们一起来认识一下田字格：田字格，四方方，书写汉字它来帮。左上格，右上格，左下格，右下格，横中线，竖中线，各个方位记心间。

2.书写一

这节课我们先送一回家。先帮老师在田字格里看一看，一应该写在什么地方？（一是由笔画横组成的，写在横中线上，从左往右，起笔重一点，收笔要顿）你们想不想写？动笔之前，我们先复习以下习字操：头正、身直、肩平、臂开。好，保持这样的姿势开始描红。描好以后，在生字本上再写几次。

3.小朋友把笔放一下，老师发现有的小朋友描得非常认真，一笔描成，而且压在横中线上。老师还发现，个别小朋友写字的时候，写着写着，不小心肩歪了，头也低了下来。其实，写字也是一种练功，那要天天练。老师相信，小朋友在练字的时候，都要提醒自己：头正、身直、肩平、臂开。相信你们一定能养成好的写字习惯。有了好的写字习惯，老师也相信，将来你们一定能把字写得非常漂亮。

这节课我们先上到这，好吗？下课！

一去二三里课件(篇9)

【教学目标】

1、能正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、复习巩固汉语拼音，会认12个生字。

3、了解这首诗表达的意境，初步感受童谣中所表现的景色美。

一、导入

小朋友们，你们会数数吗？我们先来个数数比赛，从1到10看谁数得准。

二、认识1至10的汉字写法

小朋友们看，这十位小朋友正准备练习投篮。[出示身穿球衣的十位小朋友，衣服上印有1至10的数字字样]

这里有十个篮球，[图片出示的篮球上面写有“一”至“十”的汉字字样]哪位小朋友能把这十个篮球分给十位运动员，使球上的数字和他们身上的号码相符合？

三、学习古诗

古代有位诗人把这十个数字写在了一首诗里，知道他是怎么写的吗？

（一）读准字音，掌握节奏

1、找找诗中的十个数字，看看读音有什么变化。

[设计意图：在朗读比较中发现“一”的读音变化，这样印象会更深刻。]

2、师范读，学生听，说说老师在每句诗的什么地方停顿的时间比较长，并做上记号。

3、学生自读，师生交流，正音，指导，朗读。

（二）了解诗意

1、小朋友在读这首诗的时候，眼前仿佛看见了哪些景物？谁读得越仔细，眼前看见的景物也就越多。

[设计意图：培养边朗读边想像的读书习惯。不要把书读成“小和尚念经”。]

2、根据课堂交流情况提出“烟村四五家”的两种理解：

（1）四五个冒着炊烟的村子；

（2）村里有四五户人家，还冒着炊烟。并肯定两种理解都可以。

[设计意图：诗的意象具有多重性，要发展学生的多重思维能力。]

3、请小朋友看看图，读读诗句；读读诗句，再看看图。

4、请两位小朋友合作，一位读诗句，一位指图。

[设计意图：加强语言和意象的联系，并引出当一生读“一去二三里”时，指图的学生该怎么指，即“一去二三里”该怎么理解的问题。」

5、能用手势表示“一去二三里”的意思吗？点明：“一去”，即一路走去的意思。

6、还有什么问题？

[设计意图：学生的`思维并不是教师能全部预料的，应给予一定的空间。]

（三）配乐诵读全诗

1、给诗加上题目，并指导诗题与诗句之间要停顿的读法。

2、背诵全诗，并设问：

（1）小朋友都能背这首诗了，真了不起，那你在一边背诗的时候一边看到了什么呢？

（2）这个小山村热闹吗？（这是一个静静的小山村）

（3）你来到这个山村，觉得它美吗？

（4）师总结：小山村真美啊，请小朋友们一起背，就好像走进了小山村。

［设计意图：背诵时再次启发想像，使记忆有了具体形象的支持，并再次引导学生进入诗所描绘的情景，把“彼景彼情”化为“我景我情”。］

一去二三里课件(篇10)

教学目标

1、巩固已学生字。

2、会背诵课文。

3、会正确写出一、二、四。

教学过程

（一）巩固生字

1、我会认

（1）变序抽取卡片，开火车认读

（2）找朋友游

教师拿数字卡片（1—10）问“X”的'朋友在哪里，学生则出示相应的（一—十）的卡片说“X”你的朋友在这里。

2、我会记

（1）指名说说你是怎么记住这些字的？

（2）全班交流，鼓励学生用自己的方法去记，重点分别“入”和“八”

3、我会用

（1）黑板上出示六朵花、二条鱼、一个苹果等，让学生在相应的图片下画填上相应的数字。

（2）交流我们周围还有哪些地方可以用上这一课的生字？

（二）指导背诵课文

1、全班齐读课文2—3遍

2、限时背诵课文

3、借助实物投影背课文

4、自由配上动作背课文，形式可以多样。

（三）指导书写

认识田字格

（1）谈话激趣：小朋友，我们已经知道四线三格是拼音的字，那么“田”字格（出示田字格）就是生字的家。

（2）了解田字格及横中线、竖中线、小格

（3）念儿歌记住田字格“田方格、四方方、写好汉字它来帮，左上格、右上格、左下格、右下格、横中线、竖中线，各个方位记心里。”

2、指导出写一、二、三

（1）介绍笔画“横”范写“一”边写边讲述出写要领起笔稍重，行笔稍上斜，收笔稍顿。

（2）学生描一个写一个，教师巡视，及时反馈。

（3）观察“二”与“一”的不同之处，

“三”与“二”的不同之处，（横的长短变化以及位置的变化）这两方面来说）

（4）教师范写二、三，并讲解书写要领。

（5）学生描写，教师巡回指导，讲评后要继续练。

（四）扩展活动

绕口令

四是四，十是十，

十四是十四，四十是四十，

别把十四说四十，

别把四十说十四。

儿歌

一头牛，两只鸟

三条鱼，四只鸭，

五本书，六枝笔

七棵果树八朵花，

九架飞机十辆车。

板书设计

一去二三里，

烟村入五家。

亭台六七座，

八九十枝花。

一去二三里课件(篇11)

教学目标

1、复习巩固相关的汉语拼音

2、能正确、流利地朗读课文。感受课文的意境美。

3、认识课文中的12个生字

教学过程

复习导入

1、复习六个复韵母（ai iu an un ing er）

5个整体认读 yi si vyu shi zhi

三拼音（jia zuo hua）

2、激趣导入：开学到现在，小朋友们在拼音王国里认识了许多“拼音朋友”从这节课开始，我们就要在“拼音朋友”的帮助下，去识字王国里认识“新朋友”啦！你们高兴吗？想认识它们吗？现在，让我们一起快乐地向识字王国出发！

（二）、观察图画，提出课题

1、看图说话（课文插图——引导学生观察想家并说话，图画画的是什么地方的景色？两个孩子看到了什么？在说些什么？）

2、揭示：有一首有时候的童瑶（儿歌），说的就是这幅画…一去二三里…

3、指名读课题，你是怎么认识这几个字的？

4、结合具体实例，引导理解“里”：里面，一里路等扩词的方法。

(三)图文结合，初读课文

1、教师范读课文

2、引导学生进一步说说图上的小朋友看到什么？并在图中找到“烟村、亭台、花”。

3、教师放慢语速范读，学生轻声跟读（几遍）。

（四）自读课文，学习生字

1、学生自由朗读课文，借助拼音读准字音。

2、用符号标出不会读的字，请同桌帮忙。

3、全班交流，你已经认识了哪些字？是怎么认识的？

4、教学生字

（1）出示12个生字（带拼音）用各种方式读

重点引导学生读准“四、十、三。”

（2）变序抽取12个生字（不带拼音），也用多种方式读。

（3）把12张生字卡片分类摆一摆，并说说理由？

一 二 三 四 五 六 七 八 九 十

去 里

（五）朗读感悟

1、正确、流利朗读课文，指名读、同桌互读、小组读等。

2、把课文读得有感情有韵味。

小山村的景色真美呀，谁来当图中的小朋友读读课文，告诉大家看到了什么？最喜欢什么景物？

3、找好朋友互相听听读读，互相正音。

4、男女分别齐读

（六）布置作业

把课文读给你喜欢的人听。

一去二三里课件(篇12)

人教版小学语文第一册说课稿 一去二三里说课稿

一、说教材

《一去二三里）是人教版小学语文第一册中的第一篇古诗诵读。这首诗是北宋哲学家邵雍所作，短短的20个字中，就有10个数字，这10个数字按照从小到大的顺序，巧妙地将小路、烟村、亭台、鲜花等景物编织在一起，勾勒出一幅宁静、清远、恬淡、秀美的山村风景画。

全诗描绘的意境是：在不远的地方，有一个炊烟袅袅的小山村，村子里有几户人家，山顶上有几座小亭子，路旁盛开着美丽的鲜花。

诗中的“二、三”虚指方圆之地，“四、五”泛指村落之小，“六、七”体现亭台之隐约可见，“八、九、十”形容山花烂漫，多而绚丽。

整首诗朴实有趣，琅琅上口，令人回味不已。

二、说教学目标

我上的是《一去二三里》的第一课时，定的教学目标是

1、本课要求会认的十二个字

2、正确流利地朗读古诗，背诵古诗。

3、结合图画了解古诗的大致意思，感受山村景色的美丽、恬静。

教学重难点是认识12个字，有感情地朗读、背诵古诗。

三、说教学设计

[设计理念]

这是孩子们在语文课本里首次以语文课的标准学习古诗，但并不是第一次接触古诗，我想以我们经典阅读课为依托，结合语文识字的要求，把本课定位成“古诗诵读”课。变“逐字逐句地说文解词”，为“以情激情，情中导学的自主学习”。

1、创设情境，步入诗境。低年级古诗诵读的教学要照顾学生的年龄特点，力求做到入情入境，激发兴趣，把学生引人一个如诗如画般的世界，突破学生思维从形象到抽象过渡时情景与思维脱节的难题。

2、自读自悟，了解诗意。让学生不断地在自主朗读、合作交流中读准字音，读通诗句，读懂诗意。在多种形式的诵读中加深对古诗的了解，享受审美的乐趣。

为了达成以上三个目标，我设计如下

1、激趣导入

由“奇妙的诗”引起学生的兴趣。

2、初读古诗，学习生字。

先播放古诗视频，让学生全身心感受古诗。接着让学生自读古诗，圈出生字读一读。然后老师指名带读生字，特别提醒平翘舌音。再用游戏“开火车”检查生字认读情况，并让学生组词，说话巩固生字。学完生字，第二次读古诗，认识句号，再读。还做了游戏“找朋友”，目的在于巩固生字及数字与汉字的对应。

3、借助图画，感悟诗意

出示插图，老师配乐描绘小山村的`美景，并示范朗读古诗。教学生读好古诗的方法，生加动作读古诗。走近山村感受美景，分句读，再齐读。带着对美景的感受再读。

4、试背古诗

再读了又读的基础上，让学生试着背诵古诗

5、拓展阅读

出示郑板桥用数字写的古诗，激发学生课外阅读的兴趣

6、作业

用数字说几句话，写一首诗。

四、说反思

在上课的时候，有几个地方，我觉得做的不够好。

1、老师的引导不够到位，教学不灵活，不知道随机应变。

2、整堂课气氛比较沉闷，学生的积极性不高，思维不发散，呆板。

3、老师的评价不够及时，多元，针对性。

4、时间掌握不太好，所以前面有些赶，后面又有时间多。

一去二三里课件(篇13)

第55---57课时 《一去二三里》

教学目标：

1．复习巩固汉语拼音。

2．认识12个生字，会写“一、二、三”三个字，认识笔画“横”。

3．正确，流利地朗读课文，背诵课文，能带着想象的画面初步有感情地朗读。

4．观察图画，图文结合，初步感受童谣中所表现的景色美。

教学重点：识字写字。

教学难点： 辨别“八”“入”

教具准备：课文插图或多媒体课件、生字卡片、数字卡片。教学课时： 两课时 教学过程：

一、展示成果：

1．出示生字：一 去 二 三 里 四 五 六 七 八 九 十 ①指名读----开火车读----抢读 ②去掉拼音读2遍

③识字方法：比一比：八---入 四---十

加一加：云+1=去 一+1=十

2、读词语：

三天 四只鸡 六只鹅 八条鱼 九朵花

二、观察图画，揭示课题

1．看图说话。图上画的是什么地方的景色？两个孩子看到了什么？说了些什么？

2．出示课题：有一首诗歌，说的就是这幅图。出示课题“一去二三里”。老师介绍：这是一首古诗，写的是两个小朋友出外郊游，一走就是两三里路。看见沿途炊烟袅袅，有几户人家。再往前走，看见了几座亭子，路边开满了五颜六色的野花。这里真美呀。

3．指名读课题：谁能读读课题？你是怎么认识这几个字的？

4．结合具体实例，引导学生理解“里”。

三、图文结合，初读课文

1．教师范读课文。

2．图文结合，引导学生进一步说说图上的小朋友看到了什么，并在图上找出“烟村”“亭台”“花”。

老师指着行走的孩子学生读“一去二三里” 老师指着炊烟袅袅的房屋学生读“烟村四五家” 老师指着亭子学生读“亭台六七座” 老师指着路边的花学生读“八九十枝花” 老师指着整幅画学生读整首诗。

3．放慢语速范读，学生轻声跟读（两遍）。4．学生自由读课文，借助汉语拼音读准字音。

四、朗读感悟

1．把课文读得正确、流利。个人自由读，同桌相互读，指名读，全班齐读。（相机指导“一”的变调）

2．把课文读得有感情，有韵律，了解诗意。

（1）小朋友在读这首诗的时候，眼前仿佛看见了哪些景物？谁读得越仔细，眼前看见的景物也就越多。

（2）根据课堂交流情况提出“烟村四五家”的两种理解：

四五个冒着炊烟的村子；

村里有四五户人家，还冒着炊烟。

（3）请小朋友看图，读读诗句；再看看图。

（4）请两位小朋友合作，一位读诗句，一位指图。

能用手势表示“一去二三里”意思吗？ 点明：“一去”即一路走去的意思。

还有什么问题？

（5）男女生分别齐读。

五、配乐诵读全诗

1．给诗加上题目，并指导诗题与诗句之间要停顿的读法。

2．自由配上动作背诵课文：指名背诵，小组背诵，全班齐背。

3．背诵全诗，并设问：

（1）小朋友都能背这首诗，真了不起，那你在一边背诗的时候一边看到了什么呢？ 这个小山村热闹吗？

（2）你来到这个小山村，觉得它美吗？

（3）总结：小山村真美，请小朋友一起背，就好象走进了小山村。

六、认识田字格，书写“一”

1.认识田字格

（1）谈话激趣：小朋友，我们已经知道了四线三格是拼音的家，那生字的家在哪儿呢？（出示田字格）这就是生字的家。（我们叫它“田字格”，请学生说一遍“田字格”）

（2）引导学生了解田字格的作用及横中线、竖中线、小格。

拍手读儿歌：田字格，四方方，写好汉字它来帮。左上格、右上格、左下格、右下格，横中线、竖中线，各个方位记心间。

2.指导书写“一”。

（1）教师介绍笔画名称“横”，写“一”，边写边讲述书写要领：起笔稍重，向右行笔要果断，稍上斜，收笔稍顿。

（2）学生描一个，写一个，教师巡视；讲评后学生再写。（3）教师范写“二”“三”，边写边讲述书写要领。

（4）学生分别描一个、写一个，写完后与范字对比。教师巡视，个别指导。

（5）讲评：讲评后，学生继续练写。

七、作业设计

1．今天我们学了10个表示数字的汉字。请大家课后找一找，说说看我们周围有哪些地方用上了这课的生字，比如教室里的课程表、座次表、教室门上的班级标牌，家里的日历、报纸„„比比看，看谁找得多。

2．课后找一找带有本课生字的诗或儿歌读一读。板书设计

kuai tian

hua

ge qiu（）块 田（个球

一去二三里 一去二三里 烟村四五家 亭台六七座 八九十枝花

pian gua

瓜

（tiao（yu

duo

（））片）条鱼）朵花

yjs21.cOm更多幼师资料编辑推荐

高中数学必修二课件收藏13篇

笔者不遗余力地制作出了这份令您满意的“高中数学必修二课件”。每一位教师都需要在上课之前准备一份完整的教案和课件，相信对于编写教案和课件的要求，教师们并不陌生。完整的教案是教学活动中不可或缺的重要组成部分，此处提供的阅读材料仅供参考！

高中数学必修二课件 篇1

教学目的：

(1)明确函数的三种表示方法;

(2)在实际情境中，会根据不同的需要选择恰当的方法表示函数;

(3)通过具体实例，了解简单的分段函数，并能简单应用;

(4)纠正认为“y=f(x)”就是函数的解析式的片面错误认识.

教学难点：根据不同的需要选择恰当的方法表示函数，什么才算“恰当”?分段函数的表示及其图象.

(2)图象法;

例1.某种笔记本的单价是5元，买x (x∈{1，2，3，4，5})个笔记本需要y元.试用三种表示法表示函数y=f(x) .

分析：注意本例的设问，此处“y=f(x)”有三种含义，它可以是解析表达式，可以是图象，也可以是对应值表.

注意：

函数图象既可以是连续的曲线，也可以是直线、折线、离散的点等等，注意判断一个图形是否是函数图象的依据;

列表法：选取的自变量要有代表性，应能反映定义域的特征.

例2.下表是某校高一(1)班三位同学在高一学年度几次数学测试的成绩及班级及班级平均分表：

第一次 第二次 第三次 第四次 第五次 第六次 王 伟 98 87 91 92 88 95 张 城 90 76 88 75 86 80 赵 磊 68 65 73 72 75 82 班平均分 88.2 78.3 85.4 80.3 75.7 82.6 请你对这三们同学在高一学年度的数学学习情况做一个分析.

分析：本例应引导学生分析题目要求，做学情分析，具体要分析什么?怎么分析?借助什么工具?

注意：

本例为了研究学生的学习情况，将离散的点用虚线连接，这样更便于研究成绩的变化特点;

本例能否用解析法?为什么?

拓展练习：

任意画一个函数y=f(x)的图象，然后作出y=|f(x)| 和 y=f (|x|) 的图象，并尝试简要说明三者(图象)之间的关系.

例4.某市郊空调公共汽车的票价按下列规则制定：

(1) 乘坐汽车5公里以内，票价2元;

(2) 5公里以上，每增加5公里，票价增加1元(不足5公里按5公里计算).

已知两个相邻的公共汽车站间相距约为1公里，如果沿途(包括起点站和终点站)设20个汽车站，请根据题意，写出票价与里程之间的函数解析式，并画出函数的图象.

分析：本例是一个实际问题，有具体的实际意义.根据实际情况公共汽车到站才能停车，所以行车里程只能取整数值.

如果某空调汽车运行路线中设20个汽车站(包括起点站和终点站)，那么汽车行驶的里程约为19公里，所以自变量x的取值范围是{x∈N| x≤19}.

由空调汽车票价制定的规定，可得到以下函数解析式：

根据这个函数解析式，可画出函数图象，如下图所示：

注意：

本例具有实际背景，所以解题时应考虑其实际意义;

本题可否用列表法表示函数，如果可以，应怎样列表?

实践与拓展：

请你设计一张乘车价目表，让售票员和乘客非常容易地知道任意两站之间的票价.(可以实地考查一下某公交车线路)

高中数学必修二课件 篇2

进一步熟悉正、余弦定理内容，能熟练运用余弦定理、正弦定理解答有关问题，如判断三角形的形状，证明三角形中的三角恒等式.

一、复习准备：

1. 写出正弦定理、余弦定理及推论等公式.

2. 讨论各公式所求解的三角形类型.

二、讲授新课：

1. 教学三角形的解的讨论：

② 练习：在△ABC中，已知下列条件，判断三角形的解的情况.

2. 教学正弦定理与余弦定理的活用：

① 出示例2：在△ABC中，已知sinA∶sinB∶sinC=6∶5∶4，求最大角的余弦.

分析：已知条件可以如何转化?→ 引入参数k，设三边后利用余弦定理求角.

② 出示例3：在ΔABC中，已知a=7，b=10，c=6，判断三角形的类型.

分析：由三角形的什么知识可以判别? → 求最大角余弦，由符号进行判断

分析：如何将边角关系中的边化为角? →再思考：又如何将角化为边?

3. 小结：三角形解的情况的讨论;判断三角形类型;边角关系如何互化.

高中数学必修二课件 篇3

1、正确了解普查和抽样的意义。

2、掌握抽样调查的有关概念，能够正确地选择调查方式。

过程与方法：

1、能够根据现实生活的问题，提出具有一定价值的统计问题。

2、根据现实问题的不同情况，合理选择恰当的调查抽样方式。

情感态度与价值观：

通过数学应用的广泛性，激发学习数学的兴趣，培养学生解决实际问题的能力。

教学过程：

引例：通过实例引入定义，增强学生对新学内容的理解和记忆。

教师：古往今来，人们把月饼当作吉祥、团圆的象征，每逢中秋佳节，合家团聚，吃月饼赏明月是中华民族的传统文化。月饼发展到今日，品种更加繁多，风味因地各异。其中京式、苏式、广式、潮式等月饼广为我国南北各地的人们所喜爱。为维护广大消费者的合法权益，让消费者吃上放心的月饼，从至今，质检总局已连续9年组织对月饼产品质量进行了产品质量国家监督专项检查。跟踪抽查结果表明：目前我国月饼产品总体质量状况较好，产品质量稳步提高，特别是占据月饼主流市场的均为大中型企业和名牌企业，其产品质量很好，你知道为什么用抽查的方式吗？

针对上述统计数据，回答问题：

1、什么叫普查、有哪些特点？

2、为什么要进行人口普查？

3、在第5次人口普查中，为什么会出现漏登？

4、在第5次人口普查的过程中，武汉一人口普查员劳累过度以身殉职，说明了普查有什么弊端？

5、什么样的调查适用于普查？

教师：与学生一起总结并补充板书，对能积极思考，踊跃举手发言给予加分。

讨论结果：

1、普查是指一个国家或一个地区专门组织的一次大规模的'全面调查，目的是为了详细了解某项重要的国情、国力。

普查主要有两个特点：（1）所取得的资料更加全面、系统。（2）主要调查在特定时间段内的社会经济现象总体的数量。

2、人口普查作为科学治国和宏观决策的基础。

3、的第5次人口普查，对于外出人口的界定理论上可行，但实际上划分困难。

4、人口普查要耗费大量的人力物力财力，因此难免出现漏登。

设计意图：培养学生独立思考，学以致用的能力，在这个环节中学生自评，建立自信。

问题：什么样的调查能够适用普查；什么样的调查不适用普查，那么这时采用什么调查方式？（调查具有破坏性或调查对象太多时不适用普选，这时适用抽样调查）

问题：抽样调查与普查相比，具有什么样的优点？（抽样调查最突出的有两点：一是迅速及时，二是节约人力物力和财力）

当调查的对象很少或需要掌握所有对象的详细信息时，要选用普选。

设计意图：让学生在具体的问题中学会知识的迁移应用，培养学生应用所学知识解决问题的能力；同时学生之间可以互评。

例题精选：

例1：医生如何检验人的血液中血脂的含量是否偏高？

例2：为了缓解城市交通拥堵情况，对私家车进行民意调查。

设计意图：巩固学生这节课所学内容，加强学生对普查抽样的理解。

课堂小结：

1、普查和抽样的定义及其适用的范围。

2、抽样调查的有关概念。

高中数学必修二课件 篇4

高中数学必修一教案学案

1.1集合的含义及其表示（1）

【教学目标】

1．初步理解集合的概念，知道常用数集的概念及其记法.

2．理解集合的三个特征，能判断集合与元素之间的关系，正确使用符号.

3．能根据集合中元素的特点，使用适当的方法和准确的语言将其表示出来，并从中体会到用数学抽象符号刻画客观事物的优越性．

【考纲要求】

1．知道常用数集的概念及其记法.

2．理解集合的三个特征，能判断集合与元素之间的关系，正确使用符号.

【课前导学】

1．集合的含义：构成一个集合.

（1）集合中的元素及其表示：.

（2）集合中的元素的特性：.

（3）元素与集合的关系：

（i）如果a是集合A的元素，就记作__________读作“___________________”；

（ii）如果a不是集合A的元素，就记作______或______读作“_______________”.

【思考】构成集合的元素是不是只能是数或点？

【答】

2．常用数集及其记法：

一般地，自然数集记作____________，正整数集记作__________或___________，

整数集记作________，有理数记作_______，实数集记作________.

3．集合的分类：

按它的元素个数多少来分：

（1）________________________叫做有限集；

（2）________________________叫做无限集；

（3）_______________叫做空集，记为_____________

4.集合的表示方法：

（1）________________________叫做列举法；

（2）________________________叫做描述法.

（3）_______________叫做文氏图

【例题讲解】

例1、下列每组对象能否构成一个集合？

(1)高一年级所有高个子的学生；(2)平面上到原点的距离等于2的点的全体；

(3)所有正三角形的全体；(4)方程的实数解；(5)不等式的所有实数解.

例2、用适当的方法表示下列集合

①由所有大于10且小于20的整数组成的集合记作；

②直线上点的集合记作；

③不等式的解组成的集合记作；

④方程组的解组成的集合记作；

⑤第一象限的点组成的集合记作；

⑥坐标轴上的点的集合记作.

例3、已知集合,若中至多只有一个元素，求实数的取值范围.

【课堂检测】

1．下列对象组成的集体：①不超过45的正整数；②鲜艳的颜色；③中国的大城市；④绝对值最小的实数；⑤高一（2）班中考500分以上的学生，其中为集合的是____________

2．已知2a∈A，a2-a∈A，若A含2个元素，则下列说法中正确的是

①a取全体实数；②a取除去0以外的所有实数；

③a取除去3以外的所有实数；④a取除去0和3以外的所有实数

3．已知集合，则满足条件的实数x组成的集合

【教学反思】

§1.1集合的含义及其表示（2）

【教学目标】

1．进一步加深对集合的概念理解；

2．认真理解集合中元素的特性；

3.熟练掌握集合的表示方法，逐渐培养使用数学符号的规范性.

【考纲要求】

3．知道常用数集的概念及其记法.

4．理解集合的三个特征，能判断集合与元素之间的关系，正确使用符号.

【课前导学】

1．集合，则集合中的元素有个.

2．若集合为无限集，则

高中数学必修二课件 篇5

在上一节认识空间几何体结构特征的基础上，本节来学习空间几何体的表示形式，以进一步提高对空间几何体结构特征的认识.主要内容是：画出空间几何体的三视图.

比较准确地画出几何图形，是学好立体几何的一个前提.因此，本节内容是立体几何的基础之一，教学中应当给以充分的重视.

画三视图是立体几何中的基本技能，同时，通过三视图的学习，可以丰富学生的空间想象力.“视图”是将物体按正投影法向投影面投射时所得到的投影图.光线自物体的前面向后投影所得的投影图称为“正视图”，自左向右投影所得的投影图称为“侧视图”，自上向下投影所得的投影图称为“俯视图”.用这三种视图即可刻画空间物体的几何结构，这种图称之为“三视图”.

教科书从复习初中学过的正方体、长方体……的三视图出发，要求学生自己画出球、长方体的三视图;接着，通过“思考”提出了“由三视图想象几何体”的学习任务.进行几何体与其三视图之间的相互转化是高中阶段的新任务，这是提高学生空间想象力的需要，应当作为教学的一个重点.

三视图的教学，主要应当通过学生自己的亲身实践，动手作图来完成.因此，教科书主要通过提出问题，引导学生自己动手作图 来展示教学内容.教学中，教师可以通过提出问题，让学生在动手实践的过程中学会三视 图的作法，体会三视图的作用.对于简单几何体的组合体，在作三视图之前应当提醒学生细心观察，认识了它的基本结构特征后，再动手作图.教材中的“探究”可以作为作业，让学生在课外完成后，再把自己的作品带到课堂上来展示交流.

值得注意的问题是三视图的教学，主要应当通过学生自己的亲身实践、动手作图来完成.另外，教学中还可以借助于信息技术向学生多展示一些图片，让学生辨析它们是平行投影下的图形还是中心投影下的图形.

主要通过学生自己的亲身实践，动手作图，体会三视图的作用。

教学重点：画出简单组合体的三视图，给出三视图和直观图，还原或想象出原实际图的结构特征.

思路1.能否熟练画出上节所学习的几何体?工程师如何制作工程设计图纸?

我们常用三视图和直观图表示空间几何体，三视图是观察者从三个不同位置观察同一个几何体而画出的图形;直观图是观察者站在某一点观察几何体而画出的图形.三视图和直观图在工程建设、机械制造以及日常生活中具有重要意义.本节我们将在学习投影知识的基础上，学习空间几何体的三视图.

“横看成岭侧成峰”，这说明从不同的角度看同一物体视觉的效果可能不同，要比较真实地反映出物体的结构特征，我们可从多角度观看物体，这堂课我们主要学习空间几何体的三视图.在初中，我们已经学习了正方体、长方体、圆柱、圆锥、球的三视图(正视图、侧视图、俯视图)，你能画出空间几何体的三视图吗?

①如图1所示的五个图片是我国民间艺术皮影戏中的部分片断，请同学们考虑它们是怎样得到的?

②通过观察和自己的认识,你是怎样来理解投影的含义的?

③请同学们观察图2的投影过程，它们的投影过程有什么不同?

④图2(2)(3)都是平行投影，它们有什么区别?

⑤观察图3，与投影面平行的平面图形，分别在平行投影和中心投影下的影子和原图形的形状、大小有什么区别?

活动：①教师介绍中国的民间艺术皮影戏，学生观察图片.

②从投影的形成过程来定义.

③从投影方向上来区别这三种投影.

④根据投影线与投影面是否垂直来区别.

⑤观察图3并归纳总结它们各自的特点.

②由于光的照射，在不透明物体后面的屏幕上可以留下这个物体的影子，这种现象叫做投影.其中，我们把光线叫做投影线，把留下物体影子的屏幕叫做投影幕.

③图2(1)的投影线交于一点，我们把光由一点向外散射形成的投影称为中心投影;图2(2)和(3)的投影线平行，我们把在一束平行光 线照射下形成投影称为平行投影.

④图2(2)中，投影线正对着投影面，这种平行投影称为正投影;图2(3)中，投影线不是正对着投影面，这种平行投影称为斜投影.

⑤在平行投影下，与投影面平行的平面图形留下的影子和原平面图形是全等的平面图形;在中心投影下，与投影面平行的平面图形留下的影子和原平面图形是相似的平面图形.以后我们用正投影的方法来画出空间几何体的三视图和 直观图.

①在初中，我们已经学习了正方体、长方体、圆柱、圆锥、球的三视图，请你回忆三视图包含哪些部分?

②正视图、侧视图和俯视图各是如何得到的?

③一般地，怎样排列三视图?

④正视图、侧视图和俯视图分别是从几何体的正前方、正左方和正上方观察到的几何体的正投影图，它们都是平面图形.观察长方体的三视图，你能得出同一个几何体的正视图、侧视图和俯视图在形状、大小方面的关系吗?

②光线从几何体的前面向后面正投影，得到的投影图叫该几何体的正视图(又称主视图);光线从几何体的左面向右面正投影，得到的投影图叫该几何体的侧视图(又称左视图);光线从几何体的上面向下面正投影，得到的投影图叫该几何体的俯视图.

③三视图的位置关系：一般地，侧视图在正视图的右边;俯视图在正视图的下边.如图5所示.

④投影规律：

(1)正视图反映了物体上下、左右的位置关系，即反映了物体的高度和长度;

俯视图反映了物体左右、前后的位置关系，即反映了物体的长度和宽度;

侧视图反映了物体上下、前后的位置关系，即反映了物体的高度和宽度.

(2)一个几何体的正视图和侧视图高度一样，正视图和俯视图长度一样，侧视图和俯视图宽度一样，即正、俯视图——长对正;主、侧视图——高平齐;俯、侧视图——宽相等.

画组合体的三视图时要注意的问题：

(1)要确定好主视、侧视、俯视的方向，同一物体三视的方向不同，所画的三视图可能不同.

(2)判断简单组合体的三视图是由哪几个基本几何体生成的，注意它们的生成方式，特别是它们的交线位置.

(3)若相邻两物体的表面相交，表面的交线是它们的分界线，在三视图中，分界线和可见轮廓线都用实线画出，不可见轮廓线，用虚线画出.

( 4)要检验画出的三视图是否符合“长对正、高平齐、宽相等”的基本特征，即正、俯视图长对正;正、侧视图高平齐;俯、侧视图宽相等，前后对应.

由三视图还原为实物图时要注意的问题：

我们由实物图可以画出它的三视图，实际生产中，工人要根据三视图加工零件，需要由三视图还原成实物图，这要求我们能由三视图想象它的空间实物形状，主要 通过主、俯、左视图的轮廓线(或补充后的轮廓线)还原成常见的几何体，还原实物图时，要先从三视图中初步判断简单组合体的组成，然后利用轮廓线(特别要注意虚线)逐步作出实物图.

例1 画出圆柱和圆锥的三视图.

活动：学生回顾正投影和三视图的画法，教师引导学生自己完成.

解：图6(1)是圆柱的三视图，图6(2)是圆锥的三视图.

点评：本题主要考查简单几何体的三视图和空间想象能力.有关三视图的题目往往依赖于丰富的空间想象能力.要做到边想着几何体的实物图边画着三视图，做到想图(几何体的实物图)和画图(三视图)相结合.

说出下列图7中两个三视图分别表示的几何体.

答案：图7(1)是正六棱锥; 图7(2)是两个相同的圆台组成的组合体.

例2 试画出图8所示的矿泉水瓶的三视图.

活动：引导学生认识这种容器的结构特征.矿泉水瓶是我们熟悉的一种容器，这种容器是简单的组合体，其主要结构特征是从上往下分别是圆柱、圆台和圆柱.

点评：本题主要考查简单组合体的三视图.对于简单空间几何体的组合体，一定要认真观察，先认识它的基本结构，然后再画它的三视图.

例1 (安徽淮南高三第一次模拟，文16)如图12甲所示，在正方体ABCD—A1B1C1D1中，E、F分别是AA1、C1D1的中点，G是正方形BCC1B1的中心，则四边形AGFE在该正方体的各个面上的投影可能是图12乙中的____________.

活动：要画出四边形AGFE在该正方体的各个面上的投影，只需画出四个顶点A、G、F、E在每个面上的投影，再顺次连接即得到在该面上的投影，并且在两个平行平面上的投影是相同的.

分析：在面ABCD和面A1B1C1D1上的投影是图12乙(1);在面ADD1A1和面BCC1B1上的投影是图12乙(2);在面ABB1A1和面DCC1D1上的投影是图12乙(3).

点评：本题主要考查平行投影和空间想象能力.画出一个图形在一个平面上的投影的关键是确定该图形的关键点，如顶点等，画出这 些关键点的投影，再依次连接即可得此图形在该平面上的投影.如果对平行投影理解不充分，做该类题目容易出现不知所措的情形，避免出现这种情况的方法是依据平行投影的含义，借助于空间想象来完 成.

如图13(1)所示，E、F分别为正方体面ADD′A′、面BCC′B′的中心，则四边形BFD′E在该正方体的各个面上的投影可能是图13(2)的___________.

分析：四边形BFD′E在正方体ABCD—A′B′C′D′的面ADD′A′、面BCC′B′上的投影是C;在面DCC′D′上的投影是B;同理，在面ABB′A′、面ABCD、面A′B′C′D′上的投影也全是B.

例2 (2007广东惠州第二次调研，文2)如图14所示，甲、乙、丙是三个立体图形的三视图，甲、乙、丙对应的标号正确的是( )

分析：由于甲的俯视图是圆，则该几何体是旋转体，又因正视图和侧视图均是矩形，则甲是圆柱;由于乙的俯视图是三角形，则该几何体是多面体，又因正视图和侧视图均是三角形，则该多面体的各个面都是三角形，则乙是三棱锥;由于丙的俯视图是圆，则该几何体是旋转体，又因正视图和侧视图均是三角形，则丙是圆锥.

点评：本题主要考查三视图和简单几何体的结构特征.根据三视图想象空间几何体，是培养空间想象能力的重要方式，这需要根据几何体的正视图、侧视图、俯视图的几何特征，想象整个几何体的几何特征，从而判断三视图所描述的几何体.通常是先根据俯视图判断是多面体还是旋转体，再结合正视图和侧视图确定具体的几何结构特征，最终确定是简单几何体还是简单组合体.

1.图15是一几何体的三视图，想象该几何体的几何结构特征，画出该几何体的形状.

分析：由于俯视图有一个圆和一个四边形，则该几何体是由旋转体和多面体拼接成的组合体，结合侧视图和正视图，可知该几何体是上面一个圆柱，下面是一个四棱柱拼接成的组合体.

答案：上面一个圆柱，下面是一个四棱柱拼接成的组合体.该几何体的形状如图16所示.

2.(2007山东高考，理3)下列几何体各自的三视图中，有且仅有两个视图相同的是( )

分析：正方体的三视图都是正方形，所以①不符合题意，排除A、B、C.

点评：虽然三视图的画法比较繁琐，但是三视图是考查空间想象能力的重要形式，因此是新课标高考的必考内容之一，足够的空间想象能力才能保证顺利解决三视图问题.

分析：借助于长方体模型来判断，如图18所示，在长方体ABCD—A1B1C1D1中，一束平行光线从正上方向下照射.则相交直线CD1和DC1在面ABCD上的平行投影是同一条直线CD，相交直线CD1和BD1在面ABCD上的平行投影是两条相交直线CD和BD.

3.甲、乙、丙、丁四人分别面对面坐在一个四边形桌子旁边，桌上一张纸上写着数字“9”，如图19所示.甲说他看到的是“6”，乙说他看到的是“ 6”，丙说他看到的是“ 9”，丁说他看到的是“9”，则下列说法正确的是( )

分析：由甲、乙、丙、丁四人的叙述，可以知道这四人的位置如图20所示，由此可得甲在丁的对面，乙在甲的右边，丙在丁的右边.

4.(2007广东汕头模拟，文3)如果一个空间几何体的正视图与侧视图均为全等的等边三角形，俯视图为一个圆及其圆心，那么这个几何体为( )

分析：由于俯视图是一个圆及其圆心，则该几何体是旋转体，又因正视图与侧视图均为全等的等边三角形，则该几何体是圆锥.

5.(2007山东青岛高三期末统考，文5)某几何体的三视图如图21所示，那么这个几何体是( )

分析：由所给三视图可以判定对应的几何体是四棱锥.

6.(2007山东济宁期末统考，文5)用若干块相同的小正方体搭成一个几何体，该几何体的三视图如图22所示，则搭成该几何体需要的小正方体的块数是( )

分析：由正视图和侧视图可知，该几何体有两层小正方体拼接成，由俯视图，可知最下层有5个小正方体，由侧视图可知上层仅有一个正方体，则共有6个小正方体.

分析：正四棱锥的正视图与侧视图均为等腰三角形，俯视图为正方形，对角线体现正四棱锥的四条侧棱.

问题：用数个小正方体组成一个几何体，使它的正视图和俯视图如图25所示，俯视图中小正方形中的字母表示在该位置的小立方体的个数.

(1)你能确定 哪些字母表示的数?

分析：解决本题的关键在于观察正视图、俯视图，利用三视图规则中的“在三视图中，每个视图都反映物体两个方向的尺寸.正视图反映物体的上下和左右尺寸，俯视图反映物体的前后和左右尺寸，侧视图反映物体的前后和上下尺寸”.又“正视图与俯视图长对正,正视图与侧视图高平齐,俯视图与侧视图宽相等”,所以，我们可以得到a=3,b=1,c=1,d,e,f中的最大值为2.

解：(1)面对数个小立方体组成的几何体，根据正视图与俯视图的观察我们可以得出下列结论：

①a=3,b=1,c=1;

②d,e,f中的最大值为2.

所以上述字母中我们可以确定的是a=3,b=1,c=1.

(2)当d,e,f中有一个是2时，有3种不同的形状;

当d,e,f有两个是2时，有3种不同的形状;

当d,e,f都是2时，有一种形状.

所以 该几何体可能有7种不同的形状.

2.简单几何体和组合体的三视图的画法及其投影规律.

习题1.2 A 组 第1、2题.

高中数学必修二课件 篇6

1.本课反映的是儿童生活，贴近学生的生活，宜从联系学生的自身生活经历与体验入手，去激发学生探究的兴趣，引导学生去正确的认识生活，体味成长中的快乐与烦恼。

2.紧扣教材，运用联系比较法，引导学生深入理解课文意旨；运用拓展延伸，引导学生反思自身的生活世界，领悟学习和生活的真谛。

3.自主探究与讨论交流相结合，听说读写与实践模仿相结合，以增强全员参与的兴趣，促进动脑动口动手能力的全面发展。

1.熟记鲁迅的有关知识。

2.理解并运用描写景物的手法。

3.学习并运用联系比较法，进行探究学习。

4.培养热爱自然，关注生活的态度。

1.重点：描述百草园的部分，写景抓特点、按顺序、多角度描写的手法

1.整体感知课文，理解百草园生活是儿童热爱自然，喜欢自由快乐生活的生动体现。

2.学习抓住特点、多角度、按顺序描写景物的手法。

3.掌握“不必说……也不必说……单是”的句式。

（一）导入：第一单元的文章多是反映童年和少年生活的，学过后会勾起对自己童年生活的回忆和对现在生活的反思，还会有新的感触和更深的认识。

（二）板书课题，作者。回顾有关鲁迅的知识，口答明确：原名及籍贯、地位、主要作品及学过的作品、本文的出处。

（三）释题：从题目中获得了哪些信息？（明确本文有两部分内容：1.百草园生活。2.三味书屋生活。）

（五）整体感知。

1.概括特点（参考：百草园生活：自由快乐、丰富多彩、有无限趣味；三味书屋生活：单调枯燥、乏味、受束缚）

2.找出两部分的起止句及过渡段。

（六）细读百草园部分，划出中心句。

1.小组讨论：乐园中使鲁迅感到有无限趣味，包括哪几方面？（提示：从不同角度概括。参考：从看的听的吃的玩的角度或植物动物角度或季节等）

（2）为下列描述对象加上能突出其特点的词语：

3.齐读第二节，思考：重点写的是百草园的哪个位置，用什么句式来体现？

运用：用“不必说……也不必说……单是”仿写一段话。

4.拓展：

（1）划出表现哺鸟动作的动词，推荐两小组分别上台表演。（提示：一人口述原文，一人演鲁迅，两人演小鸟；要求模拟出以下动作，鲁迅：扫开、支起、撒、系、牵、看、拉、捉拿；小鸟：飞翔、落下、啄食、飞走、罩住。）

（2）观察表演者动作，要求用上系列动词描述。

（七）作业：

1.抄录课后所列字词并用两个成语造句；

（一）检查：

1.听写并用画线词造句：菜畦  鉴赏  确凿  臃肿  轻捷  人迹罕至  人声鼎沸

1.找出直接抒情的句子，表达的是什么感情。

2.思考：练习二（2）推测原因之多，说明了什么？（明确：衬托对百草园的难舍之情。）

1.讨论：哪些内容形成了对比，说明了什么？如：（1）玩耍时与读书时不同气氛；（2）师生读书时不同态度。

2.质疑问难：为何写学生读的文字没加标点，先生读的加了标点？（明确：学生没读懂，说明所学内容脱离学生实际。）

（五）拓展：

1.比较所掌握的不同人的童年生活，说说有何感触。

2.对照自身的学习、生活，有何新的认识？

（2）与三味书屋比照：珍惜现在的学习环境，主动学习，探究学习，合作学习，寻找并体验学习中的乐趣。

（3）结合自身经历与体验，仿照本文结构，用“从……到……”作题，写两个生活片段。

提示：可从空间或时间的变化上选材，以场景描述为主，体现成长中的快乐与烦恼。

高中数学必修二课件 篇7

2．理解积累一些文言实词。

3．认识作者通过描写“世外桃源＂所表达的不满黑暗现实，追求理想社会的思想感情。

教学重点：

（1）朗读、背诵文言文。  （2）理解积累一些文言实词。  （3）把握文章的叙事线索。

教学难点：

认识作者通过描写“世外桃源＂所表达的不满黑暗现实，追求理想社会的思想感情。

同学们学过“世外桃源”这个成语吗？它就出自我们即将学习的课文《桃花源记》，这个成语是晋朝陶渊明在《桃花源记》一文中所描述的一个与世隔绝的，不遭战祸的安乐而美好的地方。现在我们一起跟着渔人到这个世外桃源去看看。

陶渊明生于东晋末朝，出身于没落的地主官僚家庭。他少时胸怀大志，博学能文，任性不羁。当时社会**不安，他有志不得展。做过小官，由于不满官场的丑恶，弃官回乡，这时他四十一岁，从此过着远离官场的隐居生活。

本文写于陶渊明已经五十七岁的时候，他不满黑暗的政治现实，同时由于他和农民接近，理解他们追求理想社会的愿望，所以写了这篇记和诗。

1、学生自由朗读课文，通过文中注释及工具书解决文中的生字，力求做到准确地朗读课文。

2、教师范读课文，边读边指出须注意的字词读音。

便舍（she3）船   豁（huo4）然开朗  屋舍（she4）  俨（yan3）然   阡陌（qian1mo4）

衣着（zhuo2）  黄发（fa4）垂髫（tiao2）  怡（yi2）然   要通邀读yao1意为邀请

咸（xian2）   间（jian4）隔   魏（wei4）晋  郡（jun4）下  诣（yi4） 刘子骥（ji4）

3、学生自由朗读后分男女朗读。

4、学生结合注释初步理解课文内容，准备开展理解活动。

四、我译大家评。

1、一个同学翻译一个句子，其他同学听后做评论，看翻译得好不好，若发现不足或有不同意见，可以说出自己的意见。

B、结合注释。注释中往往对一些难以理解的字词进行解释的。

C、结合上下句加以猜测。

D、增删调补。

3、翻译文言文的要求：

A、直译为主，意译为辅，凡是能够直译的，就按照原文逐字逐句对照翻译；

B、遇到古今异义、通假字、文言句式等语言现象而无法直译时，就可以灵活地或适当地采用意译的方法。

C、译文要通顺，没有语病，符合表达习惯。

为业：靠……谋生。缘：沿。夹岸：两岸。杂：别的。鲜美：鲜艳美丽。异：诧异，惊异。穷：走完。

DD东晋太元年间，(有个)武陵人靠捕鱼谋生。(有一天)他沿着小溪划船，忘了路程的远近。忽然遇到(一片)桃花林，(桃树)在溪流两岸，长达几百步，中间没有别的树。(地上)芳草鲜艳美丽，落花纷纷。渔人非常诧异。再往前划去，想走到这林子的尽头。

豁然：开通、敞亮的样子。开朗：开阔明亮。平旷：平坦开阔。  属：类。  悉：全。

DD (桃)林在溪水发源的地方就没有了，(紧接着)就是一座山，山上有个小洞口，(里面)隐隐约约有点光亮。(渔人)就下了船，从洞口进去。初进时，洞口很窄，只容一个人通过。又走了几十步，突然(变得)开阔明亮了。(这里)土地平坦开阔，房舍整整齐齐，还有肥沃的田地、美丽的池塘和桑树、竹子之类。田间小路，交错相通，(村落间)能听见鸡鸣狗叫的声音。（那里面的）人们来来往往耕田劳作，男女的穿戴，完全像桃花源外面的人。老人和小孩都充满喜悦之情，显得心满意足。

乃：于是。所从来：从哪儿来。要通邀，读yao1意为邀请。咸：都。问讯：打听消息。先世：祖先。妻子：妻子儿女。邑人：同乡人。不复出焉：不再从这里出去。焉：于之，从这里。间隔：断绝了往来。皆：都。叹惋：感叹，惋惜。延：请。语云：告诉（他）说。不足：不值得

DD(村中人)见了渔人，于是大吃一惊，问(渔人)从哪里来，(渔人)详尽地回答了他。(那人)就邀请(渔人)到自己家里去，备酒杀鸡做饭菜(款待他)。村中的人听说有这样一个人，都来打听消息。(他们)说祖先(为了)躲避秦时的战乱，带领妻子儿女及乡邻来到这与人世隔绝的.地方，不再从这里出去，于是就与外面的人断绝了往来。(他们)问起现在是什么朝代，竟然不知道有过汉朝．更不必说魏朝和晋朝了。渔人把自己听到的事详细地告诉他们，

DD(渔人)出来后，找到他的船，就沿着旧路(回去)，（一路上）处处做了记号。回到郡里，去拜见太守，报告了这些情况。太守立即派人跟他前往，寻找先前做的标记，终于迷失了(方向)，再也没找到原来的路。

DD南阳刘子骥，是高尚的名士；听到这件事，高兴地计划前往，没有实现，不久病死了。此后就再也没有问路探访(桃花源)的人了。

今节课我们主要的任务是疏通文中字词，初步理解课文内容。

今节课我们通过多种形式的活动来熟悉、理解课文内容为主。

二、强化朗读，熟读成诵。

三、检查学生对课文内容的理解。

学生看着课文翻译，要求不看翻译工具书，其他同学认真听，不足处请指出。（一人一段）

妻子  DD古义：妻子儿女 率妻子邑人来此绝境  今义：指男方的配偶，老婆

绝境  DD古义：与世隔绝的地方 来此绝境  今义：没有出路的地方

无论  DD古义：不要说，更不必说 无论魏晋  今义；不管（连词）

津  DD古义：渡口这里问津指探访。 后遂无问津者  今义：唾液

舍:舍弃DD 便舍船                  房子DD 屋舍俨然

寻:寻找DD 寻向所志                不久DD 寻病终

志: 动词，做标记 DD处处志之       名词，标记 DD寻向所志

为：作为DD捕鱼为业                对DD不足为外人道也

向: 以前DD 寻向所志               对着DD 眈眈

缘溪行DD名词作动词，沿着。

欲穷其林DD形容词作动词，走完。

未果，寻病终DD－名词作动词，实现。

渔人甚异之DD形容词作动词，意为感到惊奇。

有几个出自本文的成语，请找出来并理解，完成练习册P63第9题第四小题。

世外桃源DD原指与现实社会隔绝、生活安乐的理想境界。后也指环境幽静生活安逸的地方。借指一种空想的脱离现实斗争的美好世界。

豁然开朗DD从黑暗狭窄变得宽敞明亮。比喻突然领悟了一个道理。

怡然自乐DD形容高兴而满足。

与世隔绝DD与社会上的人们隔离，断绝来往。形容隐居或人迹不到的极偏僻地方。

无人问津DD比喻没有人来探问、尝试或购买。

今节课我们的任务有朗读背诵、归纳字词、理解出自本文的成语。同学们回去要对课文进行创造性阅读，在阅读时要提出你质疑之处，下节课我们共同来理解。

七、作业    翻译下面文言句子。

1．阡陌交通，鸡犬相闻。

2、黄发垂髫，并怡然自乐。

3．率妻子邑人来此绝境。

4、问今是何世，不知有汉，无论魏晋。

5．此人-一为具言所闻。

上节课我们已疏通了文章意思，这节课我们一起分析文章的内容。

1、作者怎样描写桃花林的自然景色的？

DD夹岸数百步，中无杂树，芳草鲜美，落英缤纷。

2、作者怎样描写桃花源的生活环境的？

DD土地平旷，屋舍产然，有良田美池桑竹之属。阡陌交通，鸡犬相闻。

3、作者怎样描写桃花源人的热情好客的？

DD便要还家，设酒杀鸡作食。村中闻有此人，咸来问讯。余人各复延至其家，皆出酒食。

4、桃源人见渔人为什么“乃大惊”？

DD写出桃源人对陌生人的惊异，显示桃源与世隔绝的久远。

5、渔人-一为具言所闻，桃源人为什么“皆叹惋”？

DD为桃源外的世界如此**，黑暗而叹惋，为桃源外的人没有过上安定和平的生活而叹惋。

DD不希望外人来打扰这里的生活。也为下文再寻桃源不得埋下伏笔。

7、渔人出桃源时，“处处志之”，为什么再往时，“寻向所志，遂迷，不复得路”？

DD暗示桃花源是虚构的，在现实生活中是不存在的。表达了作者无可奈何的叹惋之情

8、为什么说桃花源是当时的理想社会？我们今天应当怎么评价？

DD作者虚构的世外桃源，是与作者所处的现实社会相对照的。这里景色优美，土地肥沃，资源丰富，风俗淳朴；这里没有压迫，没有战乱，社会平等，和平安宁，确实是当时乃至整个封建社会人民理想的世界。这理想在一定程度上反映了广大人民的愿望，但在当时的条件下是不可能实现的，因而它只是一种空想。

1、全文以什么作为叙事线索？

2、当时渔人是顺流划船还是逆流划船？请找出依据？

3、渔人是第一次来这里吗？请找出依据？

4、渔人忘路之远近是因为溪流鱼多，渔人忙于捕鱼，迟迟不肯收手，还是渔人一无所获，因而不甘心，仍一路撒网而去？

5、渔人再探桃花源是否言而无信？为何找不到原先做的标记？

6、桃花源的社会与渔人所生活的社会形成鲜明的对比？请从文中找出依据？

DD村人说来此绝境的原因是“避秦时乱”，说明这里是没有战乱、没有压迫的理想地方；

村人由于长时间与外界断绝来往，因此对外面的世界一无所知，以至连桃源外的朝代的更替也不知道，渔人把自己所知道的事情都告诉村人，村人听了都感叹惋惜，为桃源外的世界如此**，黑暗而叹惋，为桃源外的人没有过上安定和平的生活而叹惋同时又为自己能置身事外而感到庆幸。

四、教师小结：

陶渊明因生活在战乱频繁的环境里，因而构想了他心目中的理想社会，表达的不满黑暗现实，追求理想社会的思想感情，具有一定的积极意义

高中数学必修二课件 篇8

通过第一章《空间几何体》的学习，学生对于立体几何已经有了初步的认识，能够识别棱柱、棱锥、棱台、圆柱、圆锥、圆台、球，并理解它们的几何特征。但是这种理解还只是建立在观察、感知的基础上的，对于原理学生是不明确的，所以学生此时有很强的求知欲，急于想搞清楚为什么;同时学生经过高中一年的学习，已经具备了一定的逻辑推理能力，只是缺乏训练，不够严密，不够清晰;有一定的自主探究和合作学习的能力，但有待提高，并愿意动手并参与分组讨论。

1. 理解空间点、直线、平面的概念，知道空间点、直线、平面之间存在什么样的关系;

2. 记忆三公理三推论，能够用简单的语言概括三公理三推论，会用图形表示三公理三推论，并将其转化成数学符号语言;

3. 明确三公理三推论的功能，掌握使用三公理三推论解决立体几何问题的方法。

1. 通过自己动手制作模型，直观地感知空间点、直线与平面之间的位置关系，以及三公理三推论;

2. 通过思考、讨论，发现三公理三推论的条件和结论;

3. 通过例题的训练，进一步理解三公理三推论，明确三公理三推论的功能。

1. 通过操作、观察、讨论培养对立体几何的兴趣，建立合作的意识;

2. 感受立体几何逻辑体系的严密性，培养学生细心的学习品质。

1. 理解三公理三推论的概念及其内涵;

(1)每位同学准备两张硬纸板，其中一张中间用小刀划条缝，铅笔三根;

(2)教师自制的多媒体课件。

1. 回忆构成平面图形的基本元素：点、直线。①两者都是最原始的概念，点没有大小、面积、厚度，直线是向两侧无限延伸的;②点用大写英文字母表示，直线用小写英文字母表示;③ 如果将点看作元素，则直线是一系列点构成的集合，所以点在直线上记作，点不在直线上记作;

2. 提出问题：构成空间几何体有哪些基本元素?(大屏幕出示棱柱、棱锥、棱台)学生很快得到答案：点、直线、平面。

3. 引入课题：什么是平面?点、直线、平面之间有什么样的位置关系?平面有什么性质?这就是我们这堂课要研究的问题。

平面也是一个最原始的概念，是向四周无限延伸的，没有边界。一般用希腊字母、、，…表示平面，或者记为平面ABC，平面ABCD等等。

①点与直线;②点与平面;③直线与平面。

问题二：要将铅笔放置到硬纸板内至少需要几个公共点?

学生通过操作，体会到要将铅笔放置到硬纸板内，只需将铅笔上两点放置到硬纸板内。

学生通过操作，体会公理二所表达的含义。

问题三：还能根据什么条件确定一个平面?引出三推论。

学生通过操作，体会公理三所表达的含义。

⒈平面具有无限延展性;

⒉ 公理一有什么功能?条件是什么?

⒊ 公理二有什么功能?条件是什么?

⒉平面几何中证明平行四边形有哪些定理?这些定理在空间中能否成立?说明理由。

高中数学必修二课件 篇9

体味本文“寄情于物”的写法并借鉴之。

启发学生领悟本文以榕树为眼前景与思乡情的触发点、联系点，并以此联想到诸多琐细平凡的故乡生活的 掠影，来表达自己真挚、浓烈而怅惘的思乡之愁。

1、课文写了几个地方的榕树？你认为文章可以分为几个层次？

2、围绕故乡的榕树，作者回忆了与之相关的哪些事情？作者用什么将这些事情连缀起来？

3、本文的三个部分衔接过渡自然。文章是怎样过渡的？

①第三段是过渡段。其中，“我的心却像一只小鸟，从哨音里展翅飞出去……停落在故乡熟悉的大榕树上。我仿佛又看到……看到……”这些词句，像一座桥，把眼前景物与思想情怀联系起来，过渡得巧妙自然。

②“那样的日子不会再回来了”一句，总结了上文，表明了回忆的结束。

③“我仿佛刚刚从一场梦中醒转，身上还留有榕树叶隙漏下的清凉”一句，和上面的夏夜描写承接，衔接自然、巧妙。

4、课文倒数第2段连用两个问句，这样写对表达情感有什么作用？

是疑问，十分真挚地传达出作者浓浓的思乡情。

①、搜集有关乡情的诗歌、文章进行交流。

②、谈谈自己感受最深刻的一次情感体会。

高中数学必修二课件 篇10

(1)理解并掌握弧度制的定义;(2)领会弧度制定义的合理性;(3)掌握并运用弧度制表示的弧长公式、扇形面积公式;(4)熟练地进行角度制与弧度制的换算;(5)角的集合与实数集 之间建立的一一对应关系.(6) 使学生通过弧度制的学习，理解并认识到角度制与弧度制都是对角度量的方法，二者是辨证统一的，而不是孤立、割裂的关系.

创设情境,引入弧度制度量角的大小,通过探究理解并掌握弧度制的定义,领会定义的合理性.根据弧度制的定义推导并运用弧长公式和扇形面积公式.以具体的实例学习角度制与弧度制的互化,能正确使用计算器.

通过本节的学习，使同学们掌握另一种度量角的单位制---弧度制，理解并认识到角度制与弧度制都是对角度量的方法，二者是辨证统一的，而不是孤立、割裂的关系.角的概念推广以后,在弧度制下,角的集合与实数集 之间建立了一一对应关系:即每一个角都有唯一的一个实数(即这个角的弧度数)与它对应;反过来，每一个实数也都有唯一的一个角(即弧度数等于这个实数的角)与它对应，为下一节学习三角函数做好准备.

重点: 理解并掌握弧度制定义;熟练地进行角度制与弧度制地互化换算;弧度制的运用.

师：有人问：海口到三亚有多远时，有人回答约250公里，但也有人回答约160英里，请问那一种回答是正确的?(已知1英里=1.6公里)

显然，两种回答都是正确的，但为什么会有不同的数值呢?那是因为所采用的度量制不同，一个是公里制，一个是英里制.他们的长度单位是不同的，但是，他们之间可以换算：1英里=1.6公里.

在角度的度量里面，也有类似的情况，一个是角度制，我们已经不再陌生,另外一个就是我们这节课要研究的角的另外一种度量制---弧度制.

1.角度制规定：将一个圆周分成360份，每一份叫做1度，故一周等于360度，平角等于180度，直角等于90度等等.

弧度制是什么呢?1弧度是什么意思?一周是多少弧度?半周呢?直角等于多少弧度?弧度制与角度制之间如何换算?请看课本，自行解决上述问题.

长度等于半径长的圆弧所对的圆心角叫做1弧度角，记作1，或1弧度，或1(单位可以省略不写).

(师生共同活动)探究:如图,半径为的圆的圆心与原点重合,角的终边与轴的正半轴重合,交圆于点,终边与圆交于点.请完成表格.

我们知道，角有正负零角之分，它的弧度数也应该有正负零之分，如-π，-2π等等，一般地, 正角的弧度数是一个正数，负角的弧度数是一个负数，零角的弧度数是0,角的正负主要由角的旋转方向来决定.

角的概念推广以后,在弧度制下,角的集合与实数集R之间建立了一一对应关系:即每一个角都有唯一的一个实数(即这个角的弧度数)与它对应;反过来，每一个实数也都有唯一的一个角(即弧度数等于这个实数的角)与它对应.

度数与弧度数的换算也可借助“计算器”《中学数学用表》进行;在具体运算时，“弧度”二字和单位符号“rad”可以省略 如：3表示3rad sinp表示prad角的正弦应确立如下的概念：角的概念推广之后，无论用角度制还是弧度制都能在角的集合与实数的集合之间建立一种一一对应的关系。

度数与弧度数的换算也可借助“计算器”《中学数学用表》进行;在具体运算时，“弧度”二字和单位符号“rad”可以省略 如：3表示3rad sinp表示prad角的正弦应确立如下的概念：角的概念推广之后，无论用角度制还是弧度制都能在角的集合与实数的集合之间建立一种一一对应的关系。

高中数学必修二课件 篇11

《文化创新的途径》是人教版高中思想政治必修Ⅲ文化生活第二单元第五课第二框题的内容。通过对前面知识的学习，学生理解了文化的交流、传播、和发展，也明白了文化发展需要创新。而怎样进行创新则是本节课探讨的内容，也是本单元的重点、难点和落脚点。同时，本课是承上启下，对接下来要学习的中华文化、中华民族精神等知识具有指导作用。在呼唤创新的当今时代，文化创新作为一个社会热点，具有很强的思想理论性、实践性。《文化创新的途径》也是高考的高频考点。

汇集实例，印证文化创新是一个民族的文化绵延不断的重要根源，阐述推陈出新、革故鼎新是文化创新的重要途径。

在教材处理方面，用教材而不拘泥于教材，为了更贴近学生实际，体现时代性，我删减了教材中徐悲鸿和梁祝的例子，增加了莫言和中国杂技芭蕾舞《天鹅湖》的内容。

根据新课程标准的要求我确立了本课的三维教学目标：

1、知识目标：

（1）理解文化创新的一个根本途径、两个基本途径。

（2）理解文化创新过程中要坚持正确方向，反对错误倾向。

（1）通过探究文化创新的事例，来激发学生热爱传统文化、

学习各民族文化长处的思想意识。

依据课程标准和考试大纲要求，在吃透教材的基础上，结合我校高二学生基础、理解能力较弱的实际，我确定以下教学重难点：

依据：本课探究是的是怎样才能实现文化创新，所以本知识点理所当然地成为本课重点。

倾向 。

依据：由于学生很难找出正确方向，分清错误倾向。所以，本知识点是难点。

突破难点方法：结合P55的“对待外来文化的三种态度” ，在教师引导下，帮助学生找出正确方向，分清错误倾向。

教必有法而教无定法，只有方法得当，才会有较好的教学效果。依据政治学科特点、本课教学内容和学生实际，备教材备学生，我将采用：

（1）情景教学法：运用多媒体技术，通过视频、图文资料为学生创设生动、直观的教学情景。

（2）讨论教学法：针对教材重难点，开展讨论，发挥学生主体作用。

（3）时事教学法：结合诺贝尔文学奖得主莫言事例进行教学，开拓学生视野，引导学生关注社会，理论联系实际。

新课程理念提出，教学中要注重学生学习方式的转变，由被动、接受式向主动参与，乐于探究、交流与合作的学习方式转变，由此我将采用：

本课主要采用多媒体和黑板相结合的教学手段，精心制作课件，发挥多媒体信息量大，感性、直观的的特点，同时板书重难点，让学生深刻记忆。

1、 初读课本，了解本框知识。

2、 根据课前预习案，明确重难点知识。

3、 查找搜集有关文化创新的社会生活例子。

结合新课标要求，本课讲授过程中，我注重突出重点，条理清晰化教学，同时积极安排自主探究活动。具体过程如下：

1、创设情境、导入新课(4分钟时)：

好的开端是成功的一半，好的导入可以激发学习兴趣，调动学习积极性。

（1）播放《喜羊羊与灰太狼》主题曲。讨论：该部影片为什么会受到广大观众的喜爱？对文化发展而言，它的成功表明了什么道理？

（2）导语：该片一改往日国产动画片人物造型呆板僵硬，说教味极浓的缺陷。以幽默的语言，搞笑的剧情，鲜活的人物造型，赢得了广大观众的喜爱。文化要想发展，就需要文化创新。那么，文化怎么才能创新呢？这就是自然而然地过渡到新课探究上来。

在结合课前预习基础上，提出导学问题：

（1）文化创新的根本途径和基本途径是什么？

（2）怎样对待传统文化和外来文化？

（3）在文化创新中错误倾向是什么？如何坚持正确方向？

让学生带着问题自主看书，找出答案，并提问学生回答，先学后教。

针对本课重难点设置以下三个情景：

展示材料1：我的故乡和我的文学是密切相关的，莫言以高密东北乡为情景，以他青少年时期的生活体验和观察发表了一系列中短篇小说，使他名声大震。

探究：你认为莫言在文学创作上能够获得巨大成功的秘诀在哪？

【教师启发】以青少年时期的生活体验和观察发表了一系列中短篇小说，说明莫言获得巨大成功的秘诀是什么？

【教师总结】文化创新的根本途径是立足于社会实践。

展示材料2：莫言将中国民间故事、历史事件与当代背景融为一体，赢得世界殊荣。

【教师启发】将中国民间故事、历史事件与当代背景融为一体说明在文化创新中启示我们需要什么？

【教师总结】文化创新的基本途径之一是继承传统，推陈出新。对于传统文化，一方面，不能离开传统文化空谈创新，另一方面，要体现时代精神。

探究：由上海城市舞蹈有限公司投资制作、中国广东杂技团创作演出的杂技芭蕾《天鹅湖》荣获曼彻斯特戏剧奖（最佳国际剧目奖）。思考杂技芭蕾《天鹅湖》的成功，给我们文化创新有什么启示？

【教师总结】成功经验是不仅继承了优秀传统文化，融入时代精神，而且注重不同民族文化之间的交流、借鉴和融合。 文化创新的基本途径之二是面向世界，博采众长。

（1）不同民族文化之间的交流、借鉴与融合是什么样的过程？（答案课本P53)

（2）在不同民族文化的交流、借鉴与融合的过程中，我们应该怎么做？应该注意哪些问题？提示：想想杂技芭蕾《天鹅湖》在文化的交流、借鉴与融合的过程中是如何做的。

总结：在文化的交流、借鉴与融合的过程中，我们应该：

（1）要以世界优秀文化为营养，充分吸收外国，文化的有益成果，取长补短。

（2）要注意不同民族文化的平等交流，互相借鉴。

（3）要坚持以我为主，为我所用基本原则。

情景三：学生思考课本P55页的探究问题。分组讨论：哪些认识是正确的，哪些是错误的，并进行简要分析。

【学生思考讨论】每组派一名代表阐述本组的观点。

【教师明确】观点一是民族虚无主义和历史虚无主义；观点二是封闭主义和守旧主义；两者都错误，我们应该树立观点三那样正确对待外来文化的观点。（引出两个概念：什么守旧主义和封闭主义，什么是民族虚无主义和历史虚无主义，让学生掌握。）

要把握好两组关系：当代文化与传统文化，民族文化与外来文化的关系。立足于发展中国特色社会主义的实践，着眼于人民群众不断增长的精神文化需求;在历史与现实，东方与西方的文化交汇点上，发扬中华胂质担东方与西方的文化交汇点上，发扬中华民族优秀文化传统，汲取世界文化精华?br>

【设计意图】本环节充分让学生自主参与，让学生成为学习的主人，避免满堂灌和空洞说教。

教师引导学生回顾新学内容，提问学生今天学了什么。强调重难点，并罗列出本框题的逻辑体系。

（08广东高考）37．（10分）看漫面，运用《文化生活》的知识．回答下列问题。

答案要点：

( l )漫画中的文化教育存在只注重中国传统文化排斥外来文化的偏差。

( 2 )①文化的交流、借鉴和融合，是学习和吸收各民族优秀文化成果．以发展本民族文化的过程：是不同民族文化之间相互借鉴，以“取长补短”的过程；是在文化交流和文化借鉴的基础上．推出融会多种文化特质的新文化的过程。

② 在文化交流、借鉴与融合的过程中，要有海纳百川的胸怀，熔铸百家的气魄，科学分析的态度。不同文化之间，有差异就难免有矛盾、有竞争．但文化差异不应该成为文化交流的障碍，文化竞争并不排斥文化合作。不同民族文化之间．应该平等交流、相互借鉴．共享世界文化创新成果。

③ 在学习和借鉴其他民族优秀文化成果时，要以我为主、为我所用。我们要跻身于世界文化发展的前沿，必须深深深植根于自己民族的文化土壤．不断实现中华民族的文化发展。

【设计意图】当堂训练，堂堂清。帮助学生了解知识的运用方式，及时检查学生的知识掌握情况。

有人说，春晚如果没有赵本山的小品，基本可以说暗淡失色，春晚因为有了赵本山及其团队的参与我们有了更多的期待，你认为赵本山及其团队怎样做才能让全国人民享受到文化盛宴？

【设计意图】布置适当、优质的作用有助于学生所学知识的巩固、深化。

采用总分式结构板书，简洁明了，条理清晰，印象深刻。

本课我力求将课堂还给学生，让学生在探究中学习，在快乐中掌握知识，教师做好课堂的组织者和引导者，而不是主宰者和传播者。

本堂课应注意，1、要根据高中生的兴趣爱好来做好充分的课前准备，收集好充分的第一手资料。2、上课的课室要带有多媒体设备，这样才能播放动画视频，帮助学生达到身临其境的效果，使学生得到深刻的体验和感悟，从而达到新课改的目标。

高中数学必修二课件 篇12

讲义1： 空 间 几 何 体

一、教学要求：通过实物模型，观察大量的空间图形，认识柱体、

锥体、台体、球体及简单组合体的结构特征，并

能运用这些特征描述现实生活中简单物体的结

构.

二、教学重点：让学生感受大量空间实物及模型，概括出柱体、锥体、台体、球体的结构特征.

三、教学难点：柱、锥、台、球的结构特征的概括.

四、教学过程：

（一）、新课导入：

1. 导入：进入高中，在必修②的第一、二章中，将继续深入研究一些空间几何图形，即学习立体几何，注意学习方法：直观感知、操作确认、思维辩证、度量计算.

（二）、讲授新课：

1. 教学棱柱、棱锥的结构特征：

①、讨论：给一个长方体模型，经过上、下两个底面用刀垂直切，得到的几何体有哪些公共特征？把这些几何体用水平力

推斜后，仍然有哪些公共特征？

②、定义：有两个面互相平行，其余各面都是四边形，且

每相邻两个四边形的公共边都互相平行，由这些面所围成

的几何体叫棱柱. → 列举生活中的棱柱实例（三棱镜、方砖、六角螺帽）.

结合图形认识：底面、侧面、侧棱、顶点、高、对角面、对角线.

③、分类：以底面多边形的边数作为分类的标准分为三棱柱、四棱柱、五棱柱等.

表示：棱柱ABCDE-A’B’C’D’E’

④、讨论：埃及金字塔具有什么几何特征？

⑤、定义：有一个面是多边形，其余各面都是有一个公共顶点的三角形，由这些面所围成的几何体叫棱锥.

结合图形认识：底面、侧面、侧棱、顶点、高. → 讨论：棱锥如何分类及表示？

⑥、讨论：棱柱、棱锥分别具有一些什么几何性质？有什么共同的性质？

★棱柱：两底面是对应边平行的全等多边形；侧面、对角面都

是平行四边形；侧棱平行且相等；平行于底面的截面是与底面全等的多边形

★棱锥：侧面、对角面都是三角形；平行于底面的截面与底面相似，其相似比等于顶点到截面距离与高的比的平方.

2. 教学圆柱、圆锥的结构特征：

① 讨论：圆柱、圆锥如何形成？

② 定义：以矩形的一边所在的直线为轴旋转,其余三边旋转所成的曲面所围成的几何体叫圆柱；以直角三角形的一条直角边为旋转轴,其余两边旋转所成的曲面所围成的几何体叫圆锥.

→结合图形认识：底面、轴、侧面、母线、高. → 表示方法 ③ 讨论：棱柱与圆柱、棱柱与棱锥的共同特征？ → 柱体、锥体.

④ 观察书P2若干图形，找出相应几何体；

三、巩固练习：

1. 已知圆锥的轴截面等腰三角形的腰长为 5cm,,面积为12cm,求圆锥的底面半径.

2.已知圆柱的底面半径为3cm,,轴截面面积为24cm,求圆柱的母线长.

3.正四棱锥的底面积为46cm,侧面等腰三角形面积为6cm,求正四棱锥侧棱.

（四）、 教学棱台与圆台的结构特征：

① 讨论：用一个平行于底面的平面去截柱体和锥体，所得几何体有何特征？

② 定义：用一个平行于棱锥底面的平面去截棱锥，截面和底面之间的部分叫做棱台；用一个平行于圆锥底面的平面去截圆锥，截面和底面之间的部分叫做圆台.

结合图形认识：上下底面、侧面、侧棱（母线）、顶点、高.讨论：棱台的分类及表示？ 圆台的表示？圆台可如何旋转而得？

③ 讨论：棱台、圆台分别具有一些什么几何性质？ 22

★ 棱台：两底面所在平面互相平行；两底面是对应边互相平行的相似多边形；侧面是梯形；侧棱的延长线相交于一点.

★ 圆台：两底面是两个半径不同的圆；轴截面是等腰梯形；任意两条母线的延长线交于一点；母线长都相等.

④ 讨论：棱、圆与柱、锥、台的组合得到6个几何体. 棱台与棱柱、棱锥有什么关系？圆台与圆柱、圆锥有什么关系？ （以台体的上底面变化为线索）

2．教学球体的结构特征：

① 定义：以半圆的直径所在直线为旋转轴，半圆面旋转一周形成的几何体，叫球体.结合图形认识：球心、半径、直径.→ 球的表示.

② 讨论：球有一些什么几何性质？

③ 讨论：球与圆柱、圆锥、圆台有何关系？（旋转体）棱台与棱柱、棱锥有什么共性？（多面体）

3. 教学简单组合体的结构特征：

① 讨论：矿泉水塑料瓶由哪些几何体构成？灯管呢？

② 定义：由柱、锥、台、球等几何结构特征组合的几何体叫简单组合体.

4. 练习：圆锥底面半径为1cm，其中有一个内接正方体，求这个内接正方体的棱长. （补充平行线分线段成比例定理）

（五）、巩固练习：

1. 已知长方体的长、宽、高之比为4∶3∶12，对角线长为26cm, 则长、宽、高分别为多少？

2. 棱台的上、下底面积分别是25和81，高为4，求截得这棱台的原棱锥的高

3. 若棱长均相等的三棱锥叫正四面体，求棱长为a的正四面体的高.

★例题：用一个平行于圆锥底面的平面去截这个圆锥，截得的圆台的上、下底面的半径的比是1：4，截去的圆锥的母线长为3厘米，求此圆台的母线之长。

●解：考查其截面图，利用平行线的成比例，可得所求为9厘米。

★ 例题2：已知三棱台ABC—A′B′C′ 的上、下两底均为正三角形，边长分别为3和6，平行于底面的截面将侧棱分为1：2两部分，求截面的面积。（4）

★ 圆台的上、下度面半径分别为6和12，平行于底面的截面分高为2：1两部分，求截面的面积。（100π）

▲ 解决台体的平行于底面的截面问题，还台为锥是行之有效的一种方法。

讲义2、空间几何体的三视图和直视图

一、教学要求：能画出简单几何体的三视图；能识别三视图所表示的空间几何体. 掌握斜二测画法；能用斜二测

画法画空间几何体的直观图.

二、教学重点：画出三视图、识别三视图.

三、教学难点：识别三视图所表示的空间几何体.

四、教学过程：

(一)、新课导入：

1. 讨论：能否熟练画出上节所学习的几何体？工程师如何制作工程设计图纸？

2. 引入：从不同角度看庐山，有古诗：“横看成岭侧成峰，远

近高低各不同。不识庐山真面目，只缘身在此山中。” 对

于我们所学几何体，常用三视图和直观图来画在纸上.

三视图：观察者从不同位置观察同一个几何体，画出的空间几何体的图形；直观图：观察者站在某一点观察几何体，画出的空间几何体的图形. 用途：工程建设、机械制造、日常生活.

(二)、讲授新课：

1. 教学中心投影与平行投影：

① 投影法的提出：物体在光线的照射下，就会在地面或墙壁上

产生影子。人们将这种自然现象加以的抽象，总结其

中的规律，提出了投影的方法。

② 中心投影：光由一点向外散射形成的投影。其投影的大小随

物体与投影中心间距离的变化而变化，所以其投影不

能反映物体的实形.

③ 平行投影：在一束平行光线照射下形成的投影. 分正投影、斜投影.

→讨论：点、线、三角形在平行投影后的结果.

2. 教学柱、锥、台、球的三视图：

① 定义三视图：正视图（光线从几何体的前面向后面正投影）；

侧视图（从左向右）、俯视图

② 讨论：三视图与平面图形的关系？ → 画出长方体的三视图，

并讨论所反应的长、宽、高

③ 结合球、圆柱、圆锥的模型，从正面（自前而后）、侧面（自

左而右）、上面（自上而下）三个角度，分别观察，画出观察得出的各种结果. → 正视图、侧视图、俯视图

③ 试画出：棱柱、棱锥、棱台、圆台的三视图. （

④ 讨论：三视图，分别反应物体的哪些关系（上下、左右、前后）？哪些数量（长、宽、高）

正视图反映了物体上下、左右的位置关系，即反映了物体的高度和长度；

俯视图反映了物体左右、前后的`位置关系，即反映了物体的长度和宽度；

侧视图反映了物体上下、前后的位置关系，即反映了物体的高度和宽度。

⑤ 讨论：根据以上的三视图，如何逆向得到几何体的形状.（试变化以上的三视图，说出相应几何体的摆放）

3. 教学简单组合体的三视图：

① 画出教材P16 图（2）、（3）、(4)的

三视图.

② 从教材P16思考中三视图，说出几何体.

4. 练习：

① 画出正四棱锥的三视图.

④ 画出右图所示几何体的三视图.

③ 右图是一个物体的正视图、左视图和俯视图，

试描述该物体的形状.

(三)复习巩固

高中数学必修二课件 篇13

②应用对数函数的性质可以解决：对数的大小比较，求复合函数的定义域、值 域及单调性。

③ 注重函数思想、等价转化、分类讨论等思想的渗透,提高解题能力。

教学过程设计：

例 1 比较下列各组数的大小。

生：可构造一个以a为底的对数函数，用对数函数的单调性比大小。

调递减，所以loga5.1>loga5.9 ;当a>1时，函数y=logax单调递

Ⅱ)当a>1时，函数y=logax在(0，+∞)上是增函数，

生：找“中间量”， log0.50.6>0，lnЛ>0，logЛ0.51，

log0.50.6

函数图象的位置关系来比大小。

2 函数的定义域, 值 域及单调性。

例 2 ⑴求函数y=的定义域。

⑵解不等式log0.2(x2+2x-3)>log0.2(3x+3)

师：如何来求⑴中函数的定义域?(提示：求函数的定义域，就是要使函数有意义。若函数中含有分母，分母不为零;有偶次根式，被开方式大于或等于零;若函数中有对数的形式，则真数大于零，如果函数中同时出现以上几种情况，就要全部考虑进去，求它们共同作用的结果。)生：分母2x-1≠0且偶次根式的被开方式log0.8x-1≥0，且真数x>0。

∴x(0,0.5)∪(0.5,0.8〕

分析：要解这个不等式,首先要使这个不等式有意义，即真数大于零，

再根据对数函数的单调性求解。

例 3 求下列函数的值域和单调区间。

师：求例3中函数的的值域和单调区间要用及复合函数的思想方法。

下面请同学们来解⑴。

生：此函数可看作是由y= log0.5u, u= x- x2复合而成。

函数y=log0.5(x- x2)的单调递减区间(0,0.5]，单调递 增区间[0.5,1)

函数都不存在，性质就无从谈起。

通过这堂课使同学们对等价转化、分类讨论等思想加以应用，提高解题能力。

①lg(x2-3x-4)≥lg(2x+10);②loga(x2-x)≥loga(x+1),(a为常数)

⑶已知函数y=loga (a>0, b>0, 且 a≠1)

①求它的定义域;②讨论它的奇偶性; ③讨论它的单调性。

⑷已知函数y=loga(ax-1) (a>0,a≠1),

这节课是安排为习题课，主要利用对数函数的性质解决一些问题，整个一堂课分两个部分：一 .比较数的大小,想通过这一部分的练习，

培养同学们构造函数的思想和分类讨论、数形结合的思想。二.函数的定义域, 值 域及单调性，想通过这一部分的练习，能使同学们重视求函数的定义域。因为学生在求函数的值域和单调区间时，往往不考虑函数的定义域，并且这种错误很顽固，不易纠正。因此，力求学生做到想法正确，步骤清晰。为了调动学生的积极性，突出学生是课堂的主体，便把例题分了层次，由易到难，力求做到每题都能由学生独立完成。但是，每一道题的解题过程，老师都应该给以板书，这样既让学生有了获取新知识的快乐，又不必为了解题格式的不熟悉而烦恼。每一题讲完后，由教师简明扼要地小结，以使好学生掌握地更完善，较差的学生也能够跟上。

高一英语课件收藏十二篇

教案课件是老师工作中的一部分，老师还没有写的话现在也来的及。教案是激发学生求知欲的有效方式，写教案课件包括哪几个部分？想要更好地掌握“高一英语课件”的知识幼儿教师教育网小编为您推荐这篇文章，希望我们的建议能够为您提供一些灵感和指导！

高一英语课件 篇1

I. 汉英翻译

1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领

2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出

3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节

4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成

5、自求之路 10、开始干某事

II单词拼写

1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.

2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.

3.He was (极度) angry at the news.

4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.

5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.

6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.

7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .

8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.

9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.

10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.

III单项选择

1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.

What will of her ?

She is going to be a teacher.

A. when, happen B. before, become

C. after, take place D. since, instead

2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.

A.When the first time B.During the first time

C.For the first time D.The first time

3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.

A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which

4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.

A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out

5.Hard work success while failure laziness.

A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in

C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by

6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.

A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing

7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.

A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from

8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.

I my hair and sunglasses.

A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing

C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on

for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.

A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as

C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than

10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.

A. within B.beyond C.out D.from

11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.

A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for

12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.

A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of

C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of

13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.

A. most of it B.two thirds of whom

C.70% of which D.mainly of them

14._____of the city lies a lake.

A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East

IV.课文填词

1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.

2.What has______her?

3.On November 12th the storm died______.

4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.

5.I did so______regret.

6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.

7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.

8.Henan province lies _____central china.

9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.

The Key

I :

1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world

3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health

5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of

7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day

9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something

II

1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial

III

1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD

IV:

1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off

高一英语课件 篇2

1. dress up

2. celebrate & congratulate

3. would & used to

4. as well as & as well

5. as much as

6. each time & time-clause

7. Earth Day

8. Day Off & Day On

9. the living and the dead

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

11. April Fool's Day

12. play tricks on sb

13. take in

14. decorate

15. jealous & envy

16. grave & tomb

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

Word Study

1. theme

⑴ a subject of a talk or piece of writing 题目；主题；话题

Stamp collecting was the theme of his talk.

⑵ an idea that is developed or repeated in the work of a writer or artist

主题,中心思想

2. dress up (Point 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

3. parade: an occasion when a group of people stand or walk in a

procession so that people can look at them 游行 ;行进

there used to be a military parade in Red square on I May.

4. Ramadan: the ninth month of the year in the Moslem calendar 斋月

5. Arabic: of or relating to Arabia, the Arabs, their language, or their culture.

阿拉伯人的(尤指其语言或其文学)

㈠ Arab: a member of an Arabic-speaking people; a member of a people

who lived originally in Arabia and who now live in many part of the

Middle East and North Africa 阿拉伯人

㈡ Arabia: a peninsula of southwest Asia between the Red Sea and the

Persian Gulf. Politically, it includes Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Oman, the

United Arab Emirates, Qatar, Bahrain, and Kuwait. Arabia has an

estimated one third of the world's oil reserves.阿拉伯半岛

亚洲西南部的一个半岛，位于红海与波斯湾之间。政治上它包

括沙特阿拉伯、也门、阿曼、阿联酋、卡塔尔、巴林及科威特。据估计，

阿拉伯半岛拥有世界储油量的三分之一

㈢ Arabian: of Arabia, esp the peninsula consisting Saudi Arabia and

several other countries 阿拉伯的, 阿拉伯人的

Arabian bird 凤凰 Arabian jasmine 白茉莉

Arabian camel (阿拉伯产的)单峰驼

Arabian Nights《一千零一夜》(《天方夜谭》)

㈣ Arabic : the Semitic language or writing of the Arabs which is the main

language of North Arabia, the Middle East and Arabia 阿拉伯语

6. holy

⑴connected with God or with religion and therefore very special or sacred

神圣的；上帝的

the Holy Bible 圣经

⑵ (used about a person) serving God; living according to a strict or

highly moral religious or spiritual system; pure; saintly 圣洁的

7. Easter: the Sunday in March or April when Christians celebrate Christ's

return to life 复活节

8. symbol

㈠ symbol

⑴ something that represents or suggests something else such as an idea

or quality 象征

The lion is often used as a symbol of courage.

The colour white is a symbol of purity.

In the picture the tree is the symbol of life and the snake the symbol of

evil.

⑵(for) a letter, sign or figure which expresses a sound, operation,

number, chemical substance, etc. 符号，记号, 标记

H2O is the chemical symbol for water.

In maths, x is the symbol for an unknown quantity.

The marks +、－、× and ÷ are symbols for add, subtract, multiply,

and divide.

㈡sign

⑴a standard mark, something which is seen and represents a

generally-known meaning; symbol 符号，记号

The signs for add, subtract, multiply and divide are +、－、×、÷.

A red flag was placed there as a sign of danger.

⑵a movement of the body intended to express a particular meaning or

command; signal 手势，姿势，信号

He nodded as sign of agreement.

She put her finger to her tips as a sign to be quiet.

He made a sign for me to follow him.

⑶ a notice giving information, warning, direction, etc. 标志,标记,告示

The sign by the road said ‘No Parking'.

⑷ (of) something that shows or points to the presence or likely future

existence of a particular condition, fact or quality 迹象;痕迹, 征兆

There are no signs of life about the house. 这房子没有有人住的迹象。

She saw no sign that he would change his mind.

㈢signal: something intended to warn, command, or give a message,

such as a special sound of action; a indicator, such as a gesture or

colored light, that serves as a means of communication. 信号,暗号

The railway signal showed that the train could pass.

Traffic signals tell drivers when to stop and go.

9. fighting: the occasion when people fight 战斗, 打仗

10. conflict

⑴ a fight or argument 打斗; 争执

a hand -to-hand conflict 短兵相接 a bloody conflict 血战

⑵ a difference between two or more ideas, wishes 冲突; 矛盾

conflict between the two countries 两国间的冲突

conflict between religion and science 宗教与科学之间的冲突

11. argument

⑴ a disagreement esp one that is noisy; quarrel 争论, 争辩, 争吵

The argument among the two parties was blown up by the press.夸大了

 They were having an argument about whose turn it was to do the

cooking.

They got into an argument about politics.

⑵ (for, against) a reason given to support or disprove something

论据; 理由; 理由

There are many arguments against smoking.

 This argument, however, does not hold water.

The risk of heart disease is a powerful argument against smoking.

⑶ the use of reason to decide something or persuade someone

按理; 说理; 辩论; 说服

We must settle this by argument not by fighting.

⑷ a short account of the story or subject of a book, poem, etc; summary

(文学作品的)梗概; 概要; 指要; 主题

⑸ (idm) put forward an argument 提出论点

⑹ (idm) drive an argument / a point home: make one's point clear

把论点讲透彻, 阐明观点

He drove home his point by citing specific examples.

⑺ (idm) fall into an argument with 与...发生争论

12. destruction

㈠ destruction: destroying or being destroyed摧毁；毁灭；毁坏

The fire caused the destruction of my books.

㈡ construction: building or being built 建设，建造

construction industry 建筑业

The new airport is still under construction

13. opinion

⑴ what a person thinks about sth. based on personal judgment rather

than actual facts 意见，看法， 主张

⑵ what people in general think about something 舆论

Public opinion is against him.

⑶ professional judgment or advice [专业性的] 鉴定，劝告，意见

You should get a second opinion from another doctor.

⑷ (idm) in one's opinion: as sb thinks; as information, experience lead

him to believe照某人的意见

In my opinion, he is not right.

14. major

⑴ great in size, importance, seriousness重大的; 主要的

the major part 主要部分 major subjects 主修(专业)课程

major party (有竞选力量的)主要政党

a major surgical operation 外科大手术

⑵ an officer of middle rank in the army 陆军少校

15. probably

㈠ probably: almost (but not quite) certainly; according to what is likely;

most likely; presumably 很可能地；大概

㈡ possibly: perhaps; according what is possible 或许；也许

16. honour

⑴n something that gives pride or pleasure 光荣

It was a great honour to be asked to speak at the conference.

⑵ the respect from other people that a person, country gets because of

high standards of behaviour and moral character 崇敬

⑶ v to; show great respect for sb or sth or to give sb pride or pleasure

向...表示敬意

I am very honoured by the confidence you have shown in me.

⑷ to keep a promise to do sth履行诺言

17. ancestor

㈠ ancestor: a person in your family who lived a long time before you,

from whom you are descended; forebear 祖先

Mary's ancestor settled in our country a hundred years ago.

㈡ offspring: a child or children; the young of an animal后代

㈢ descendant: a person, an animal, or a plant whose descent can be

traced to a particular individual or group 子孙

18. principle

⑴ a basic general rule or truth about sth原则；主义

We believe in the principle of equal opportunity for everyone.

⑵a rule for good behaviour, based on what each person believes is right

行为准则

a person of high moral principles

⑶ a law of science 原理/ 定律

 The system works on the principle that heat rises.

19. unity: the situation in which people are untied or in agreement

联合,团结, 统一

the unity of opposites 对立的统一

the unity of motive and effective 动机和效果的统一

Unity is strength, unity is victory. 团结就是力量, 团结就是胜利。

20. community

⑴the group of people who live in a particular place, area or country

社会, 社区

community welfare department 社会福利部

Recent increases in crime have disturbed the whole community.

⑵ a group of people who have sth in common 团体，社团，界

the Chinese community (纽约的)华侨（界）

the community of scholars 学术界

community antenna television (缩写为CATV)共用天线电视

⑶ society as a whole; the public 大众

He did it for the interests of the community. 为了公众的利益才这么做

21. nation

⑴ a people who share common customs, origins, history, and frequently

language; a nationality 民族,

the Chinese nation 中华民族

⑵ a relatively large group of people organized under a single, usually

independent government; a country 国家

a most favoured nation 最惠国 the United Nations 联合国

22. purpose: an aim or a goal; an intention or plan; a person's reason for

an action

⑴ the reason for doing or meaning sth 目的；意图

The main purpose of this meeting is to decide what we should do about the problem of noise.

⑵ having an aim or plan and acting according to it 有目标

a good leader inspires people with a sense of purpose.

⑶ (idm) on purpose: not by accident; with a particular intention

故意；蓄意

I came a it early on purpose to see if I could help you.

23. creativity: the ability to make or produce new things, especially using

skill or imagination 创造力; 艺术创新

We want teaching that encourages children's creativity.

24. faith

⑴ firm belief; trust; complete confidence 信心；信念；信任

Children usually have faith in their parents.

I have faith in his ability.

We have faith in ourselves.

We should have faith in our Party and our government.

He has faith in my ability.

I have faith in you; I am sure you will do well.

He still has great talent, but he has lost faith in himself.

⑵ (loyalty to one's) word of; honour; promise (对承诺，诺言等的)信守

You must keep faith with him.

You cannot expect your friends to trust you if you do not keep faith with

them.

Don't break faith with him.

 I kept faith with them.

I told her in all good faith that I would be there, but I wasn't able to go.

⑶ (in) belief and trust in God 对上帝的信仰

Had it not been for her great faith in God, she would have given up.

⑷ a system of religious belief; religion 宗教信仰

Faith can remove mountains.

The Christian faith

He is a member of the Catholic faith Islamic faith.

The ceremony was attended by representatives of the Christian and

Jewish faiths.

25. commercial

⑴ connected with buying and selling goods 商业的；商务的

commercial traveller 旅行推销员

A commercial college teaches things that would be useful in business.

⑵ making a profit 获得利润的；可获利的

Oil has been found in commercial quantities. 发现大量有商业价值的石油

26. joy

⑴ a feeling of great happiness 欢乐, 喜悦, 快乐，乐事, 乐趣

We'd like to wish you joy and success in your life together.

⑵ a person or thing that gives ;you great pleasure 使人高兴的人或事

That class is a joy to teach.

27. light

⑴ v make sth start to burn or shine（常与up连用）点火，点燃

Will you light the fire for me?

⑵ give light to sth so that you can see it dearly照亮；使光明

We lit the candle and the candle lit the room.

⑶to become bright with pleasure or excitement

（常与up连用）使容光焕发,喜形于色

Her face lit up with joy when she saw her mother coming.

⑷ n the natural force that takes away darkness so that objects can be seen

光，光亮

The sun gives us light during the day.

He worked by the light of a candle / the moon.

⑸sth that produces light and allows other things to be seen , such as a

lamp or torch发光物；光源; 灯

⑹adj of little weight, not heavy 轻的，不重的

The basket is very light; I can easily pick it up.

28. similar

⑴ like or alike; of the same kind; almost but not exactly the same in

nature or appearance近似的； 类似的；相似的

⑵ exactly the same in shape but not size 相似的

similar triangles have equal angles

29. generation: the children or the parents or the grandparents

⑴ a period of time in which a human being can grow up and have a family,

about 25 or 30 years 代，一代（约25 - 30年）

Members of my family have lived in this house for generations.

⑵ all the members of a family of about the same age(一家庭中的)一代人

We belong to the same generation.

 This family photo shows three generations: myself, my parents, and my

grandparents.

⑶ all people of about the same age 世代; 一代人, 同龄人

Most people of my father's generation have experienced war.

⑷ all the members of a developing class of things at a certain stage

同一时代的产物

second generation computers

⑸ the act of process of generating 产生， 生产

the generation of electricity by water-power

⑹ (idm) generation gap: the difference in ideas, feelings and interests

between older and younger people, esp. considered as causing lack of

understanding; a broad difference in values and attitudes between one

generation and another, especially between young people and their

parents 代沟，两代人之间的隔阂

How can teachers help to bridge the generation gap between parents and their teenage children?

30. play a trick on sb: deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

31. salute

⑴a sign that a soldier, etc makes to show respect, by raising he hand to

the forehead军礼（行举手礼、鸣礼炮、降旗礼）

The soldier saluted his officer.

⑵ an action that shows respect for sb 致敬表示

The next programme is a salute to one of the world's greatest film stars.

⑶ v to show respect with a salute（常与to连用）向… 致意，向…致敬

The soldiers saluted as they marched past the general.

This is the day on which we salute those who died in the war.

32. kiss touch someone with your lips to show your love or to say hello or

goodbye; to touch or caress with the lips as an expression of

affection, greeting, respect, or amorousness 接吻

kiss her goodbye 和其他用语

⑴ to say goodbye to sb ⑵ to wave goodbye to sb

⑶ to nod goodbye to sb ⑷ to kiss sb goodbye

⑸ Goodbye till tomorrow! ⑹ Goodbye for today.

33. cheek: one of the two parts of your face that are on each side of your

nose and mouth and below your eyes; the fleshy part of either side of

the face below the eye and between the nose and ear脸颊；面颊

Her cheeks became red after she ran up the stairs to the six floor.

34. nod

⑴ to lower and raise the head quickly, as in agreement or

acknowledgment (he act of admitting or owning to something

承认) 点头, 表示同意或致意

⑵ to let the head fall forward when sleepy 打盹；短时的小睡

He nodded off on the train. 在火车上打瞌睡

35. celebration: the act or occasion of doing sth enjoyable because sth

good has happened or because it is a special day 庆祝, 庆典

36. reminder: sb or sth that makes you remember sth.提醒的人, 暗示

We received a reminder that we hadn't paid the electricity bill.

37. respect

⑴ v to admire or have a high opinion of sb or sth

(与of, for连用) 尊敬; 尊重

I respect his courage.敬佩他的勇气

I'll respect your wishes. 尊重你的愿望

⑵ to show care for or pay attention to sb or sth; to show careful

consideration for 关心；注意；重视

We should respect other people's cultures and values.

I promise to respect your wishes.

⑶ n (for) the feeling that one admires someone or something very much

and that they or it should be treated well and honourably 尊敬; 尊重

They stood in silence for one minute as a mark of respect for the dead.

The young should show respect to those who are older

The students have great respect for their teachers.

⑷ (for) consideration or care 关心；考虑；顾虑； 重视

The secret police show little respect for human rights.

Electricity is dangerous and should be treated with respect.

⑸ a detail; particular point 细节；方面

In many respects the new version is less good than the old one.

38. Mexico: a country of south-central North America 墨西哥

39. skeleton: the structure formed by all the bones in a human or animal

body（人或动物的）骨骼

a dinosaur skeleton in the Natural History Museum

40. gift

⑴ something which is given willingly; present 礼品；赠品

Christmas gifts

⑵ (for) a natural ability to do something; talent 天赋，天资；才能

He has a gift for poetry.

 a man of many gifts 多才多艺的人

gift of the gab 口才

⑶ v to present with a gift 赠送礼物

41. cycle

⑴ v to ride a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle 骑车骑自行车等

He usually cycles to school.

Go cycling is a common way of talking about cycling for pleasure.

⑵ n a series of events, etc that happen repeatedly in the same order

循环；周而复始

the cycle of the season

the seemingly endless cycle of violence in this troubled part of the world

⑶ the period of time needed for this to be completed 周时, 周年

the life cycle of insects

⑷ a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle.

自行车，摩托车自行车，摩托车，或者类似的交通工具

42. fool

⑴ n a person who is lacking in judgment or good sense 蠢人, 傻瓜; 白痴

I'm a fool, I left my coat on the train.

⑵ v to deceive; trick 愚弄；欺骗

He fooled me into giving him money.

You can't fool her; she's much too clever for that.

43. take in (Point 13)

⑴ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑵ to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

⑶ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑷ to deceive 欺骗

Don't be taken in by his promise.

44. invitation: inviting or being invited 请帖；邀请

We had three invitations to parties.

45. occasion

⑴ a particular time when sth happens特殊场合； 特殊时刻

a great occasion 盛大的场面

⑵ the suitable or right time for sth良机；机会

I shall tell her what I think if the occasion arises.

⑶ usage:

① You used occasion when you mean the time is right or suitable for sth.

I saw them at the funeral, but it was not a suitable occasion for discussing holiday plans.

② You use opportunityor chance when you mean that it is possible to

do something.

I was only in Paris for one day and I didn't get the opportunity /

chance to visit the Louvre. (巴黎的)卢佛尔宫

⑷ a special event, ceremony; a happening; an incident重大的事件；事故

II Language Points

1. dress up (Word 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

You don't need to dress up for this dinner.

I don't want to go to their wedding because I hate dressing up.

⑷ Notes:

① dress up 后接in表示“穿...服装打扮”

I just love the fun of dressing up in ancient clothing.

② dress up 后接as表示“打扮成...”

 The little girl dressed herself up as a angle. (天使)

③ be dress in “穿着...”

She is always dressed in white.

2. celebrate & congratulate

㈠celebrate: do sth special and enjoyable on an important day or because

of an important event 庆祝, 祝贺, 庆贺

The people celebrated the victory.

We celebrated Christmas with a tree and presents.

we had a party to celebrate Mother's silver wedding.

㈡congratulate: to express one's pleasure, praise, or admiration for sb

because of a happy event or sth. successfully done

恭喜；祝贺，向...祝贺

I congratulated my friend on her birthday.

 Let me congratulate you on the birth of your daughter.

We all came up to congratulate on the winner.

I'm writing to congratulate you on your being awarded the first prize in

the contest.

I congratulate you on your great success.

3. would & used to

㈠would

⑴ used as the past form of 'will' when you report what sb says or thinks

They said that they would help us.

⑵ used with 'like' or 'love' as a way of asking or saying what sb wants

Would you like to come with us?

⑶ used for talking about things that often happened in the past 过去常常

 When he was young he would often walk in these woods.

㈡used to

⑴ used to: habits or states that existed in the past but no longer exist

He used to be a teacher in our school.

His father used to play football very well when he was young.

⑵ be (get) used to: in the habit of sth or doing sth习惯于

She is used to the weather here.

He has got used to getting up early.

⑶ be used to do: passive voice

Coal is used to cook our food.

Steel is used to make a lot of things.

4. as well as & as well

㈠ as well as

⑴ equally excellent; no less than同样好

You can't do it as well as I can.

⑵ in addition to; and also; besides和；及； 除...之外

He was my friend as well ;as my doctor.

The book tells about the author's life as well as about his writings.

㈡ as well (as sb or sth): too; also; in conjunction with sb or sth specified;

in addition to sth 还；也；此外还

She knows English and French as well.

When we asked them to stay for the weekend we didn't realise they

would be bringing a couple of dogs as well.

5. as much as

⑴ to the extent, degree, or quantity as 尽多，一样多

Take as much as you like.

⑵ (or so much as) just the same as; almost; practically; really

等于；几乎；实际上；真正地

By running away he as much as admitted that he had taken the money.

⑶ (or much as) even though; although 虽然；尽管

As much as I hate to do it, I must stay home and study tonight.

⑷ as much as, as well as, no more than, no less than, rather than, but,

with , along with, together with, like, besides, except, in addition

to和 “of +名词”等,连接两个并列主语时,动词的单复数和第一个主

语保持一致.

Mary as well as her classmates has learned to drive a tractor.

My classmates as much as I are glad to hear that.

The teacher together with his students is going to visit the Great Wall

I rather than he am to blame.

No one except Xiao Wang and Xiao Li has been to Beijing.

He, like you and me, likes to play football.

The number of the students of our class is 50.

He, no less than you, is worthy of being praised.

His brother, no more than Jim, are to be answered for it.

6. each time & time-clause

⑴each time (every time) 每次

Each time I meet an Englishman, he starts off the conversation with

some comments on the weather.

Every time I travelled by boat, I got seasick.

⑵ by the time 到...时候

He had studied English for three years by the time he came to our

school.

The truck will have arrived by the time you have all the things packed

up.

⑶ the last time 在最后一次

The last time she saw Mr Brown, she was sitting on a sofa.

⑷ the first time 在第一次

The first time he spoke in public, he felt shy.

⑸ the second time 在第二次

The second time (that) we met, he replied to a lot of questions.

⑹ all the time 一直；始终

There were twelve of us, who never took a European meal all the time

we were in China.

⑺ at the time 在...时候

I told you at the time that I thought you were stupid.

⑻ from the time 自从...时候起

From the time the Red Army first came into being, its relationship with

people, in the words of Mao Zedong, was the relationship of fish and

water.

⑼ next time 在下一次...

Next time you come, you will see him.

⑽ the day 在那天

I saw them the day I left for Europe.

⑾ the week (that) 在...那周

We were there the week that it snowed so heavily.

7. Earth Day

Earth Day was first celebrated in 1970 to show international concern

for the environment. It is not, however, an official government holiday

in many countries.

8. Day Off & Day On: 休息日和奋斗日

To have “a day off” means to stay home from work for a day, usually

to relax. A “day on” means that although an American doesn't work that

day, they should do something serious to honour the man for whom the

holiday is given.

9. the living and the dead

某些形容词前加 the 表示一类人，其意义为复数。 如： the poor,

the rich, the old, the young, the sick, the dead, the brave, the deaf and

dumb, the oppressed, the injured, the wounded, the unemployed 等。

The old are taken good care of.

The rich get richer and the poor get poorer in many countries.

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

fairly good = 60 points very good = 100 points

rather (pretty, quite) good = 80 points or so

㈢ Note:

⑴ 只有rather能接比较级和too, 其余三个不能

rather warmer, rather too sure

I can't make a decision now, I need rather more time to think it over.

稍多

⑵quite 和 rather 可用在冠词前，也可和动词连用，其余两个不能

quite a good film, rather a good idea,

Rather the impression I wanted to give you.

I quite like her.

I rather enjoy doing nothing.

⑶ quite, fairly 和 rather也可放在a(n)之后，只有名词前有形容词时，才这

样用

a quite good film, a fairly interesting lecture, a rather good idea

⑷ quite可与绝对形容词连用，其他三个不能

quite right, quite completely, quite perfect, quite absolutely, quite

mistaken, quite round

11. April Fool's Day: April Fool's Day is traditionally a day to play practical

jokes on others, send people on fool's errands, and fool the

unsuspecting. No one knows how this holiday began , it was thought to

have originated in France.

12. play tricks on sb(Word 30)

deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

13. take in (Word 43)

⑴ to deceive; cheat; fool 欺骗;愚弄

Don't be taken in by his promise.

Many a person has been taken in by that trick.

⑵ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

He needs some time to take the situation in.

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑶ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

Now that his parents are dead, who will take athe boy in?

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑷to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

14. decorate

⑴to add sth in order to make a thing more attractive to look at装饰；点缀

We usually decorate the main streets with flags on holidays.

Decorate the cake with cherries and nuts.

⑵ to put paint and wallpaper onto walls, ceilings and doors in a room or

building 油漆；粉刷

I think it's about time we decorated the living-room.

15. jealous & envy

㈠ jealous

⑴ feeling upset because you think that sb loves another person more than

you 吃醋

Tom seems to be jealous whenever Mary speaks to another boy!

⑵ feeling angry or sad because you want to be like sb else or because

you want what sb else has 嫉妒

He is jealous of their success.

⑶ wanting to keep what one has; envious （常与of连用）妒羡的；羡慕的

She is jealous of our success.

I was jealous of Sarah when she got her new bicycle.

I was very jealous of Sarah's new bicycle.

㈡ envy

⑴ n. (at, of, towards) the feeling you have towards sb. when you wish that

you had their qualities or possession 羡慕; 妒嫉

They are full of green of envy when they saw my new car.

Their beautiful garden is the envy of all the neighbours.

He was filled with envy at my success.

His success is the envy of us all.

⑵ v. feel envy towards sb. because of sth. 羡慕; ；妒嫉

I envy your ability to work so fast.

I don't envy you your journey in this bad weather.

I envy you your health.

I envy him his experience.

They envy him his success.

The award made him envy you and he is no longer your friend.

16. grave & tomb

㈠grave

⑴ the place in the ground where a dead person is buried 坟墓，墓地

He put some flowers on the grave.

⑵ death 死亡

Is there life beyond grave?

㈡ tomb

⑴a place where a body is buried, often one with a large decorated stone

above 坟墓

the Ming Tombs reservoir

⑵a monument commemorating the dead 墓碑

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

㈠ calendar

⑴ a list that shows the days, weeks and months of a particular year

日历, 月历, 年历

tree ring calendar 年轮历

A calendar is often hung on a wall and may have a separate page for

each month, sometimes with a picture or photograph.

⑵ a system for dividing time into fixed periods and for marking the

beginning and end of a year 历法

the Muslim calendar

From January 1st to February 1st is one calendar month.

⑶ a list of dates and events in a year that are important in a particular

area of activity 全年大事表;一览表；记录表

school calendar, academic calendar 校历

㈡ lunar: of, for, or to the moon; be connected with the moon；

involving, caused by, or affecting the moon 月球的

㈢solar: of or from the sun; relating to, or proceeding from the sun

太阳的

高一英语课件 篇3

1. explain to sb. sth.=explain sth. to sb. 向某人解释某事

5. lie to 位于……

7. on your father’s side 父系的,你父亲的血统

16. have a natural deep harbor 拥有天然的深水港

17. a very beautiful natural landscape 自然风光优美

20. take possession of 拥有……

21. settle mainly on the North Island 主要在北岛定居

23. sign an agreement with 同……达成协议

27. be native to 原产于……

41. attract tourists from all over the world 吸引世界各地的游客

5. use electric pumps in irrigation 使用电泵灌溉

7. increase agricultural production 增加农业产量

8. control…with computers 用计算机控制……..

16. from generation to generation 一代又一代

19. as…as possible 尽可能……

35. the condition of the soil 土壤的条件

41. change into 把…改变为…..

48. be a practical guide to…. 实用的….指南

49. plant wheat close together 密植小麦

13. act the role of 起…….作用,扮演….的角色

21. date back to/from 追溯到---

22. have --- in common 与-有共同之处/共用

23. intend to 打算做……

30. entertain the audience with 用……逗乐观众

33. quarrel over small matters 争论小事

34. be on good terms with 同某人关系好

35. in the other direction 在另一个方向

39. be angry with sb. for sth. 因某事生某人的气

2. express one’s thoughts and opinions 表达某人的思想和意见

4. thanks for 感谢……

5. help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做……

7. communicate with 与……交际 …

8. from culture to culture 从一种文化到另一种文化

10. learn about 打听…

13. be used to do 被用来做……

14. vary from culture to culture 因文化的不同而不同

17. look directly into someone’s eyes 直视

18. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把头靠在手背上

19. get through difficult situations 摆脱困境

26. get into contact with sb. 与某人取得联系

29. lose/break contact with 与……失去联系

32. give sb. a hand--do sb. a favor 帮助

33. manage to do=succeed in doing sth. 努力且成功的做某事

35. carry a very heavy suitcase 提着很重的手提箱

37. vary from culture to culture 文化与文化不同

38. look directly into one’s eyes 直视某人的眼睛

39. make a circle with one’s thumb and index finger拇指与食指做成圆形

41. have opposite meaning 有相反的意思

44. greet with a kiss on the cheek 以轻吻面颊欢迎

45. press one’s palm together 紧紧的握手

46. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把手靠在手背上

47. move the hand in circles over the stomach 用手在肚子上画圈

49. find friends in a world of strangers 在一群陌生人中找到朋友

51. express almost any emotion 表达几乎任何一种感情

53. smile at oneself in the mirror 在镜子中对自己微笑

54. see the smiling face of a good friend 看到好朋友的笑脸

10. become popular around the world 在世界上受欢迎

高一英语课件 篇4

She said, “ They are using PSAs to educate people.”

She said that they were using PSAs to educate people.

“ We must not give up in the face of pressure.” she said.

She encouraged us not to give up in the face of pressure.

Step 2 Direct speech and reported speech (直接引语和间接引语)

He said, ‘I will go to school tomorrow.’

He said that he will go to the school the next day.

She said to me , ‘I am going to London with my father.’

She told me that she was going to London with his father.

She said, “Do you often come here for a visit.”

She asked if I often went there for a visit.

人称变化：

①He said, “I have been to Japan.”

He said that ___ had been to Japan.

②She said, “I'll give you an exam tomorrow.”

She told us that ______ would give ____ an exam tomorrow.

③She asked me, “When do they have their dinner?”

She asked me when _____ had _____ dinner.

She said. ”I have lost a pen.“→

She said. ”We hope so.“ →

She said. ”He will go to see his friend。“→

注意：①The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”

→

②“I’ll never forget the days in the country.”

③My father said to me, “I read the book in 1986.”

→

④He said to me, “I have taught English since I came here.”

→

代词 this→ 地点状语 here→

状

语 now→ bring→

today→

this week→

yesterday→

last week(month)→

Three day (month) ago→

tomorrow→

next week(month)→

1. ‘I will come and see you again this evening, Tom.’ he said.

2. ‘I will come here again today,’ she said.

The doctor said to the patient, ‘You will have to wait till 3 pm tomorrow.’

1. “I never eat meat.” he said.

He said that ______ never ______ meat.

2. “I’ve found my wallet.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ ______ ______ wallet.

3. “I took it home with me.” she said.

She said that ______ ______ _______ it home with her.

4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”

The teacher said that the sun ______ in the east and ______ down in the west.

5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ met the day ______.

6. “You must come here before five.” he said.

He said that I ______ to go ______ before five.

7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.

He said that he _______ bought the house 10 years _______.

He said, “I came to see you.”

Tom said, “Do you have any difficulty with English?”

He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”

He asked, “Do you speak English or Chinese?”

I asked, “Will you take bus or on foot?”

He said to me，“Where are you from?”

He asked us, “How many factories are there in your country?”

①She said to us, “Please have a break.”

②The teacher said, “Don't smoke in the classroom.”

③The officer said, “Go out!”

She said, “What a lovely day it is.”

1. Our teacher asked us _____ our dictionaries to school.

A. bring B. brought C. bring D. to bring

2. The teacher told the boy students ______ football on the grass.

A. not play B. not to play C. played D. playing

3. Betty asked her sister ____ to the railway station to see her off.

A. not to come B. not to go C. to not come D. to not go

4. The pupil asked his teacher _____ round the earth.

A. whether the moon goes B. that the moon went

C. whether the moon goes D. whether the moon went

5. She asked him ____.

A. whose dictionary this isB. whose dictionary that was

C. whose dictionary is this D. whose dictionary that is

6. Mary’s mother asked her _____.

A. that whether she had finished her homework

B. if she has finished her homework

C. if she had finished her homework

D. that if she had finished her homework

7. Do you know ____?

A. what is he doing B. what he doing

C. what he is doing D. what does he do now

8. I don’t know ____ to learn English.

A. when did he begin B. when he began

C. he when began D. when he begins

9. You can’t imagine ____ when they received these nice Spring Festival presents.

A. how excited they were B. how excited were they

C. how they were excited D. they were how excited

10. Do you remember how many times ____ to Australia?

C. have you beenD. you have been

11. The boss asked his secretary ____ ____he had finished typing the report .

C. whether; or not D. whether; not

12. I wonder how much _____.

A. does he spend on his car B. did he spend on his car

C. he spent on his car D. he spent in his car

高一英语课件 篇5

Subject: English Grade One, Class Six Class Time :Monday, August 23,

Revision(Unit13-17)

------- Focusing on the key phrases and structures

Teaching goals

1. Help students strengthen what they have learnt in the past half term

2. Make them relaxed fully in order that they can deal with the coming exam at their best.

3. Make them have a further understanding about some key structures.

Teaching important points

1.How to motivate our students when they are playing the games

2.How to help them to keep the key phrases and structures by heart efficiently.

Teaching difficult points

1. How to keep the activities well organized and how to clarify some complicated structures.

2. How to give the instructions simply and clearly

Class Type

I am making for a new way to review language knowledge more efficiently

Teaching methods

1. Communicative teaching methods

2. Integrate competitions into the process of reviewing

3. Group work.

4. Induce students to analyze some key structures

5. Strengthen the teaching effects by giving them great encouragement.

Teaching aids

Papers, blackboard, slide projector

Homework

Prepare themselves for the coming examination

Summary after Class

The goals made before class have been reached quite well. The students took part in the games actively. They are quite pleased to accept this way of teaching.. However, the amount of knowledge they have really learnt by heart is a little less than we have anticipated beforehand . So we have to admit the fact that it is rather difficult to combine the communicative teaching ways with the current teaching conditions, in which we have such a large class including fifty-six students or so and the great pressure coming from the miscellaneous examinations.

Teaching procedure

Step 1 A competition for key phrases(10 minutes)

T: Good morning, boys and girls .Have you prepared well for the coming exam? Do you feel a little nervous about that ? Now let’s relax ourselves together. We will have a competition. We have four unknown slides. They are slide A, slide B, slide C, and slide D. Each slide has six phrases in Chinese on itself. In our class we have four groups. Every group can get a slide by drawing lots(抽签).In the end , we will see which group can translate all of these phrases into English correctly., Ok , now every group will send a student out to choose your slide.

Group 4 : (A)junk food, ought to , plenty of , keep up with , make a choice, now and then

Group 1: (B)dress up, in one’s opinion, play a joke on sb., take in, call on, bring back

Group 3: (C)pay off, at most, act out, a great deal of , a number of , pick out

Group 2: (D)around the corner, come to terms with, die down, day and night, take possession of, make up

T: Good job. You have finished it very well except for only one mistake. Group 3 have mixed up two phrases.

We should pay attention to the answer to NO.4 in the slide C, The right answer should be ”a number of”. And the answer to NO.5 in the slide C should be “a great deal of ”. Let’ look at another slide.

T: Group1, Group2, Group4 each have got 10 points. Congratulations! Group 3 has got 5 points. Try harder, guys.

Step 2 Design a form about those modal verbs which are used to express possibility.(18minutes)

T: Our competition will continue. We have learnt that “must , can/could, may/might “can be used to express possibility.

Can you try designing a form to make it clear how to use them in different sentence styles and different tenses. Group members should work together to get the best one in your group. Give you ten minutes to prepare for it.

T: Ok, the time is up. You can’t change it any more. Different groups can exchange your forms, and let’ s compare them with each other. Oh, which do you think is the best one?

Ss: We have agreed on the form made by group 3 .

T: Let’s have a look at it with the projector.

Modal verbs to Tenses

express guess or possibility Present

Or

Future

Present continuous Past

Or

perfect

Positive

sentences must:: very sure, certain

may

might perhaps, maybe

could possible

Modal

verb

+do/be

Modal verb

+be doing

Modal verb

+have done

Negative

sentences Can’t very sure

Couldn’t it is impossible

May not perhaps

Might not not

Question

sentences

Can/could

T: Well done. Your group deserve another ten points and the other three groups each have got five points

Pay attention to two points: (1)“mustn’t” means “You shouldn’t do it”, or “you are forbidden to do something.”. If you want to express you are sure that something is impossible, you should use “ can’t or couldn’t” to say that.(2)Look at the following examples.

a. He must be a student, isn’t he?

b. He must have finished it, hasn’t he?

c. He must have done it yesterday, didn’t he?

If we write the first part of each sentence without “must”, we’ll get three sentences like these.

a’. He is a student b’. He has finished it. c. He did it yesterday.

We got the second part of a, b, c from the sentences a’,b’,c’. Actually, we don’t try to guess any more in the second part of Sentence a, b, c.

Step 3 A game named “single or plural”(15mintues)

T: The following game is still played among groups. The knowledge you will use in this game is Subject-verb agreement.

T:(facing the group 1) Let’ s take Group 1 as an example. I have some phrases for your group members which can be used as subjects. As soon as I tell you one, you should tell me whether its predicate verb is single or plural. I will tell you my phrases one by one and you guys give me your answers one by one. You must do it as quickly as possible because you have only three minutes. Within three minutes, the group who has got the most correct answers is the winner Let’s have a try.

T: physics

S1: single

T: a library together with books

S2: single

T: not only the teacher but also the students

S: plural

… … …

… … …

T: Do you know the rule of the game , S10? Can you tell us something about it?

S10: Yes.I think every student has a chance to take part in the game. It’s very exciting.

T: Quite right. Remember only your first answer makes sense. Anyone can not answer it twice in the same round.

T: When one student is telling his answer, others should keep quiet. Let’ s start our game from group 4.

(maths, the number of students , a number of students, everything, both A and B, half of the food, half of the students, fifty percent of the population, ten pounds, works, every possible means , a clerk and secretary, every boy and every girl, more than one , many a , the pair of glasses, the glasses, bread and butter, the United States, cattle …)

T: Ok, the game is over. Group1 has got 15 points ,.Group 2 has gained 17 points. Group 3 has got 21points. Group 4 has scored 14 points.

Step 4 Summary(1minutes)

Let’s look at our score board

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

30 32 36 29

T: Congratulations. Group 3 win the game at last.

Step 2 Homework(1minutes)

I will assign you nothing for homework. Just remember to prepare yourself for the coming examination. Keep yourself in a high spirit and never forget to relax yourself now and then.

高一英语课件 篇6

提问是阅读教学中使用得最频繁的教法之一。目前语文教学中已形成众多流派,不管哪一派都离不开设计 问题、提出问题、运用问题,开启学生心智,引导学生理解课文。那么究竟应该如何提问呢?本人认为,要研 究阅读教学如何提问,首先要探讨何以要提问。

作为一种教法,提问是师生课堂会话的方式。提问是一种言语行为,属“语用”范畴,提问时使用的问句 属“语形”范畴,而问句中包含的问题属“语义”范畴。

二十世纪科学哲学的一个重要成果,是发现智力活动的起点在发现和提出问题。英国科学家波普尔科学发 现的模式就是:“问题(1 )--假设(猜测)--验证--问题(2)”。因此, 问题也是教师启发学生, 打开思路,开发智力的钥匙。布鲁纳的“发现法”,第一步设卡,即让学生认识上产生矛盾,发现问题;第二 步设法,就是让学生运用已有知识框架或认识结构,在教师点拔下试作解答;第三步验证,如果解答正确,也 即动用旧框架同化了新信息,进一步丰富了已有的框架,如果错了则帮助学生调整或转换旧框架,形成新框架 ;第四步小结,即反馈、总结。认识心理学中的“SQ4R阅读方法”,首先是预习或概观,在此基础上即是“提 问”,然后精读(阅读、思考),最后是复述和复习,以加深记忆;其主要特征就在于提出问题、回答问题, 对教材进行细致、深化的加工。

阅读理解有不同层次。章熊先生分为:(1 )复述性理解(着眼于表层信息,侧重记忆);(2)解释性理 解(通过信息加工, 由表及里、由此及彼,转化为自己的认识);(3 )评价性理解(对文章价值作用评价) ;(4)创造性理解(超越本文,探索新问题,提出新见解)。按章先生的意见,四个层次由低到高排列,而中 学阶段的阅读理解应以一、二两项为本(注:《特级教师--专家学者之选》。)。理解的层次不同,问题的 层面和提问方法也会有所不同。例如,在低年级使用的谈话法适用于复述性理解,提出反常问题,克服学生思 维定势使用于创造性理解。本人认为,狭义的理解应指“解释性理解”,是实现阅读目标的关键,也是阅读智 力活动的核心,想象、欣赏、评价、记忆、创造、应用都以此为基础。

西方解释学是关于文本意义的解释和理解的一种理论与方法或哲学,有助于探讨“解释性理解”的本质。 解释学认为,阅读是读者和本文的对话、交流。伽达默尔说:“使留传下来的本文成为解释的对象,就意味着 它向解释者提出问题,……理解本文也就是理解这个问题”;而“问题的重建变成了我们自己的提问,这种重 建可以把本文意义理解为其回答”,“我们这些努力要求理解的人,必须通过自己让本文讲话”(注:《哲学 译丛》1986年第三期。)。作为接受者总是以提问者身份出现,而作为本文则以对答者身份出现,双方建立起 问答的伙伴关系;而理解就是通过对话、问答而达到“视界融合”的过程。所谓视界是一个从已有知识框架出 发所能理解的可能范围,读者不断从自己已有视界出发,进入本文的视界,形成一个既非自己也非本文的新视 界,具有新的可能性。达到理解的标准就是解释学家所说的“解释学循环”--整体只有通过理解它的部分才 能得到理解,而对部分的理解又只能通过对整体的理解。“解释学循环”有两层意思:

(一)古典解释学认为,作品自身作为整体包括意义、风格、结构等,作品的各部分诸如章节、词句等, 必须放在这个整体中才获得理解与意义;而作品相对于产生它的整个历史文化背景而言,又是这一文化背景的 部分,作品必须放在这一历史文化背景的整体关系中才能得到理解。对这一层次的“解释学循环”,钱钟书先 生表述得最为清楚:“乾嘉‘朴学’教人,必知字之诂,然后识句之意,而后通全篇之义,进而窥全书之指。 虽然,是特一边耳,亦祗初桄耳。复须解全篇之义乃至全书之指(“志”),庶得以定某句之意(“词”), 解全句之意,庶得以定某字之诂(“文”),或并须晓会作者立言之宗尚,当时流行之文风,以及修词异宜之 着述体裁,方概知全篇或全书之指归。积小以明大,而又举大以贯小,推末以至本,而又探本以穷末;交互往 复,庶几乎义解圆足而免于偏枯,所谓‘阐释之循环’者是矣。”(注:钱锺书《管锥篇》第一册,中华书局 出版。)

(二)当代解释学认为,更重要的是解释者的前理解(已有知识框架)形成的视野(整体)与作品(部分 )的关系。读者已有的知识框架是向本文敞开的倾向性,在已有框架引导下进行理解活动,同时也在理解活动 中受到检验、调整、修正,使本文的意义显现出来,因此理解决不是消极地复制本文,而是一种“生产性”、 “构成性”的努力。伽达默尔认为,理解永远是由整体(读者的前理解)运动到部分(作品),又回到整体( 读者所达到的新的理解)的理解。而所有部分与整体的和谐状态便是正确理解的标准。

根据当代认知科学研究成果,阅读理解同时存在两种信息加工方式:资料驱策加工和概念驱策加工(注: J.R.安德森《认知心理学》,吉林教育出版社出版。)。“资料驱策加工”是对来自本文的信息加工,本文从 低到高有如下分析平面:语音平面、书写平面、词汇语义平面、句法平面、语篇平面和语篇所指平面。对本文 各平面从高到低,从低到高的加工相当于“解释学循环”的第一层意思。可是读者的心智并不是一张“白纸” ,本文仅仅是信息的一个来源,其它信息还来源于读者头脑中已有的知识,一个人对有关本文的知识越多,理 解效果越好,就能以最短时间、最少努力,有选择地使用最有成效的线索探索文章语义和句法制约关系,从本 文中构造出意义,这种加工方式称为“概念驱策加工”。读者头脑中已有的知识相当于解释学家说的“前理解 ”,因此这种加工方式也相当于“解释学循环”的第二层意思。任何认识的发生、发展都是认识的外源因素和 认识的内源因素双向作用的结果,阅读也是双向建构,阅读理解要达到两个平衡:作为客观的本文的整体和部 分的协调,作为主体认知框架的平衡。

阅读教学中,教师的主导作用在于通过提问,引导学生达到“解释性理解”,起导读作用。这就要遵循“ 解释学循环”的原则,启发学生同时进行两种方式的信息加工,提高理解水平,培养迁移能力。

以上主要从解释学维度讨论了何以要提问,阅读教学中如何提问就有了根据。

课堂提问的组成是阶梯式的:最高层次是“课”,其次是“课段”,再次是“回合”(一次问和答),最 低层次是“话步”(教师的“问”和学生的“答”)。

我们先讨论“回合”。教师和学生的对话并没有信息沟,教师提问并不是要从学生那里获得信息,而是要 启发学生获得信息或检查学生是否已获得信息。一般会话结构是两话步:一种是A(问)--B(答),A(再问 )--B(再答);一种是A(问)--B(答),B(问)--A(答)。而课堂会话结构是三话步:T(教师问 )--S(学生答)--T(教师评价小结)。第三话步是信息的反馈, 即使有学生能作出正确回答,但不等于 所有学生都能回答,应重复学生的回答以面向全体学生。

由回合到课段,提问有一个开始到结束的框架,每次提问都有一个焦点,如何组织一个课段的提问呢?遵 循“解释学循环”的原则,大致有两种方式。

(一)由浅入深,由表及里。

1、由表层到深层,由具体到抽象。于漪老师《七根火柴》第21 节的提问设计是:(1)无名战士留给人间 的最后话语是什么?(2)无名战士留给人间的最后动作是什么?(这两个是表层问题。)(3 )这些言行显示 了他怎样的心灵、怎样的精神?(4)和一般人相比, 他的伟大之处是什么?(这两个是深层问题。)《截肢 和输血》第1 节提问:(1)白求恩同志是在怎样的气候下赶路的?(冷)(2)作者怎样描写冷?(这两个是 具体的问题)(3)作者着力描写气候寒冷的用意是什么?(这个问题较抽象。)

2、层层深入。如钱梦龙老师《捕蛇者说》第1节的提问:(1 )这种蛇特别,文中用了哪一个字?(“异 ”)(2)“异”在哪里? (归纳为:色、毒、用)(3)作者突出了哪一个?(“毒”)(4)为什么?(陪 衬赋敛之毒)(5)为什么永州人民还“争奔走焉”? (将捕蛇和纳税联在一起)后一问句的焦点以上一问句 提供的新信息为依托,层层递进。

(二)整体--部分--整体。

本人在教《白杨礼赞》第7节的提问设计是:(1)上一节从外形上写白杨树不平凡,本节从哪一方面赞美 白杨树的不平凡呢?(内在气质)(2)作者调动哪些手段赞美白杨树的内在气质?(排比、比喻、拟人、对比 、欲扬先抑)(3)“伟丈夫”和“好女子”对比, 这个“好”是什么含义?(美丽)(4)为什么要用这样的 对比和隐喻? (突出其壮美,并由赞美树过渡到赞美人)(5 )作者用什么手法进而揭示其象征意义?(反问 排比句)(6)这几个排比句之间有什么联系? (由外到内,层层深入)(7)四个反问句句式上有什么变化,

怎样逐步深化点出象征意义?(略)(8)这一节在全文起什么作用? (赞美的高潮所在,精华所在)。

在组织课段提问时,要防止孤立式的提问。一位新教师教读《挖荠菜》第2节提了三个问题:(1)“馋” 是什么意思?(2 )馋到什么程度? (3)饿到什么程度?关键要问:为什么要写馋(突出饿)和写“饿”反 映了什么,才能由表及里。

在课堂上,提问的展示由“回合”到“课段”,再到“课”;可是教师在设计提问时是从“课”到“课段

高一英语课件 篇7

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Type of lesson: warming up & Listening

Teaching aims：

1. Help the Ss talk about archaeological discoveries and describe the life of people in China during the periods of the Stone Age, the Bronze age, Han Dynasty and Tang Dynasty.

2. By listening to the material on Page 74, students can know what the tool looks like, what its use is and so on and by practice, students can master the ways to get the main idea of the passage and some important or useful details.

Teaching focus: Train Ss’ listening ability.

Teaching aids: tape recorder, worksheet & computer

*********************************************************************

Teaching Procedures:

I. Warming up

Step 1. Ask the students some questions and show them some pictures of archaeological discoveries. Introduce the words “archaeology, archaeologist.”

1) T: China is a country with an ancient civilization. It has a long history and brilliant culture. In which ways can we learn about its history and culture? (Archaeology)

2) What can archaeological discoveries bring us?

Step 2. Present some typical archeological discoveries and lead the Ss to talk about them.

1) T: Please look at the pictures and talk about them.

Questions for thinking:

----What are these important discoveries ?

----What period of time do they belong to?

Step 3. Help the Ss describe the life of people in China during the periods above.

1) T: What can they remind us of ?

Remind us of the history

1.What they ate

2.Where they lived

3.What their houses looked like

4.What kind of tools they used

5.What kind of entertainment they had

……2) Discuss and talk about the following items.

Stone Age Bronze Age Han Dynasty Tang Dynasty

Food

Housing

Home decoration

Tools

Artefacts

Entertainment

Step 4.Help the Ss get to know more important discoveries.

1) Match the time with the place where its relics are unearthed:

Stone Age Mawangdui

Han Dynasty the Banpo Ruins/ the Ruins of Hemudu

Bronze Age the Ruins of the Chang’An City

Tang Dynasty the Ruins of Yanshi Erlitou(1959, Henan)

2) Let the Ss enjoy the pictures and answer the questions.1. Where were they unearthed ?

2. Where can you go if we want to visit them?

II. Listening

Step 1. Pre-listening

1. Show students three pictures. And ask them in which period of time the people in the pictures lived. (Stone Age)

2. Show students some pictures of the tools used by the people in Stone Age. And ask them if they are asked to introduce one of these tools to other people, from which aspects they are going to describe them.

what it looks like

when it was found

where it was found

when it was used

usage

how to use it

…

Step 2 While-listening

1. First listening to get the main idea.

What are they talking about?

A. a short stick.

B. an ancient weapon to throw spears.

C. a little carved animal.

2. Second listening

Task: Listen and write down the questions asked by the students.

1) What ____________________________________________?

2) What ____________________________________________?

3) How ____________________________________________?

4) How ____________________________________________?

5) Where ___________________________________________?

3. Listen to the tape for the third time

Task: Get the answers to each of the questions.

Questions 1: What is it?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It looks like ____________ to me; about ___________.

2) At the top there’s a little ________________________.

3) At the bottom end there are __________ through the stick.

4) On the right there are __________of a young baby goat that is _________.

☆ Make a drawing of the tool.

Question 2: What was it used for?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It is an _____________. One of the __________________.

2) There were bears that ______________________________ and very large kind of _____________________________________________.

3) It was too dangerous to ______________________________ or even _____________.

Question 3: How did it work?

☆ Listen and finish the exercises.

1). How far can you throw a spear with our arm?

A. 15m B. 50m C. 45m

2). How far can you throw a spear with a tool like this?

A. 90m B. 300m C. 60m

3).By using this tool it could be thrown ___________________________________ and with _____________.There are three holes. One __________________________________, one __________________________, and ______________________was tied into the smallest one. A spear of about ________________ was laid on the stick, resting against the small piece of ____________ or leather. With a _________ on the string and a ________________ of the arm, the spear would be thrown.

Question 4:When and Where was it found?

☆ Listen and answer the questions

1) How old is it?

a) 1 to 2,000 years

b) 10 to 20,000 years

c) over 5000years

2) In how many places were this tool found?

Three.

3) How did people in South America and Australia know about this tool?

They invented it again.

Step 3 Post-listening

Task: Write a passage to introduce an ancient tool.

1) Show students a picture of different tools used by people in Bronze Age, and ask them to have a discussion about which one they are interested in.

2) According to the questions and answers in the listening material, students write a short passage to introduce one of the tools in the picture.

3) Present in class.

III. Homework

1) Revise their passage.

2) Preview the reading part of this unit.

Self-evaluation

Unit 20 Reading

Type of lesson: Reading

Teaching aims: Get the Ss to know about the King of Stonehenge

Improve the Ss’ reading ability

Important points: the Ss get a good understanding of the text

Difficult points: Ss’ reading ability get improved

Teaching aids: a tape recorder ,a computer and worksheets

Teaching procedures:

Step I. Pre-reading.（leading-in ）

some pictures about famous tombs in Chinese history

2.When we discover a tomb of a king in China, what can usually be found in it?

( clothing, knife, pottery, jewellery, tools etc. )(leading the Ss know more words about them.)

3.Why were these things buried with the dead king or emperor？

Key：A.To show off their power and wealth.

B. To protect these things.

C. Want the died people to use them after their death.

D. To be given to him for his use in the next life.

F. To show people’s respect to the death.

Step II. While -reading

A. Fast reading to get the main idea of each paragraph, and then divide it into parts

Part 1 (para. 1): The discovery of a grave.

Part 2 (para.2_to 3_): Objects found in the grave.

Part 3 (para. 4_-_5): The importance of the discovery.

Part 4 (para. 6_-7_): About Stonehenge and the King of Stonehenge.

B. Detailed reading:

1. Read the first three paragraphs to find out

1) Which objects were found in the grave of the King of Stonehenge?

Key: a pin, clothing, a coat, a knife, earrings, arrows and a bow tools, weapons, pottery & jewellery

2) Which materials were found?

Key: fur, stone, clay, pottery, copper, bone, and goldRead paragraph 4 & 5 to answer the following question:

1) What are the five reasons to show the importance of the discoveries ?

Key: a) His grave is the richest of any found from that period.

b) This was a time when the first metals were brought to Britain.

c) This man was buried with two gold earrings which are the oldest gold ever found in Britain.

d) He was buried three miles from Stonehenge at the time when the great stones were being brought to Salisbury to build it.

e) He is an example of people who brought culture and new techniques from the European mainland to Britain.

3. Read Part 6&7. do T or F exercises

1) The biggest stones came from a long distance away.

2) Archeologists know how early man was able to construct Stonehenge without the use of modern constructions and machines.

3). The King of Stonehenge was likely to be involved in planning and

helping build the monument.

4). The King of Stonehenge came from Central Europe.

5). At first people thought that it was through was and armed conflict not

through trade and cultural links that the skills to make copper and bronze objects spread to Britain.

( Check the answers: F F T T T)

C. Language points:

1. Buried with him were the tools of a hunter or warrior.

该句为倒装句, 表语置于句首时, 倒装结构为“表语+系动词+主语”。

e.g. Present at the meeting were Professor White, Professor Smith and many other guests.

2. Some of the objects found in the grave give us an idea of how he was dressed when he was buried.

found in the grave是过去分词作定语

give sb. an idea of 使某人明白

e.g. The book will give you an idea of what everyday life of ordinary

Americans is like.

3.That would have made him a man of distinction.

must/may/might+have done (肯定) 对过去事实的推理

e.g. He might have given your more help, they were busy. I can’t find my pen

anywhere. I must have lost it.

can +have done 表示对过去事实疑问和否定的推测

e.g. He can’t have finished the work so soon.

could + have done 意为“过去能够,而事实上却没有”,表示一种遗憾

e.g. He always works hard. He could have passed the exam.

should / ought to +have done 意为“过去应该…但没有…”,有责备对方的意思

e.g. You should have told me the news an hour ago.

shouldn’t / oughtn’t to +have done 意为“过去不应该…，却…”,意在责备对方

e.g. You shouldn’t have told him the news. He was nearly sad to death.

needn’t + have done 意为“过去本没有必要..…却……”

e.g. There was plenty of time, she needn’t have hurried.

might + have done 表示“过去本可以….却没有…”

e.g. They might have given you more help, though they were busy.

Step III. Post reading.

1. From things that were found in the grave, archeologists now believe that people in the Bronze Age in England had trade and cultural links with other parts in Europe. Give examples of such links and what was traded.

country or part of Europe material or object of trade

West Wales stones to build Stonehenge

Spain copper knife

France copper knife

Europe gold jewellery

2. For trade and cultural links as well as life in Britain and the construction of Stonehenge, people in the Bronze Age must have had knowledge about certain things and certain fields of science. Work in groups to talk about the inventions and kinds of science they must have had, based on the reading passage.

activity knowledge, science, inventions and tools needed

1. travel to Scotland roads, shoes, language

nstruction of Stonehenge hammers, ropes, sth. to transport heavy stones, architecture

3. hunting rope, string, bow, arrows, spear, sticks

4. trade with Europe money or goods to trade, boats, bags, maps, language

5. making copper knives fire, chemistry, physics, pots, hammers

Homework:

With the development of modern tourism, more and more culture relics were destroyed by human beings, read the passage below, and think about “what should we do to protect our cultural heritage.”

Saving Stonehenge Oct.22nd,

With almost a million people visiting the monument each year, Stonehenge has become surrounded by roads and parking lots.

Recently, a group archaeologists decided to to restore Stonehenge to its natural setting. One road will be removed, and another will be routed through an underground tunnel. Today’s parking lots will become open fields, and a new visitors’ center will be built four kilometers away.

Unit20. Word Study

Type of lesson: word study

Teaching Contents: spare, average, date, cover, dress, find

Teaching Aims：Help the students grasp the usages and meanings of the above

words or phrases.

Important points: use the above words or phrases correctly and freely

Teaching Procedures:

I. spare

A. Read the following sentences and point out the part of speech of “spare” and the meaning of the underlined part

1. The boy loves surfing the internet in his spare time. (在空闲的时间里)

2. You should carry a spare tire in the back of your car. .( 备用胎)

3. I can’t spare the time for a holiday at present. . (抽出，腾出)

4. Can you spare me just a few minutes? . ( 抽出，腾出 )

5. He doesn’t spare any effort on his studies. .( 不遗余力)

6. Spare the rod and spoil the child. （不打不成器)

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of “spare”

Spare : Adj. 1.空闲的；2.不用的，闲置的；3.备用的，外加的；

Verb, 1.抽出，拨出，留出；2.不吝惜（时间，金钱）

C. complete the following sentences.

1.What do you usually do _____________________( 在你空余时间)？( in your spare time)

2.You’re driving to Tibet? It’s a long way. Be sure to ________________________ ( 带个备用胎) (bring a spare tire)

3.We can ________________________(给你腾出一间房)（spare one room for you ）

4. He _____________(想尽各种办法)to make her happy.(spares no effort)

II. average

A. present the following sentences.

1. The average of 4, 5 and 9 is 6.平均数

2. Tom’s work at school is above average, while Mary’s is below average. 高于/低于平均

3. The average age of the boys in the class is 17.平均的

4. What is the average temperature in Wuhan in August?

5. If you average 7, 14 and 6, you get 9. 均分

6. On average, there are 20 boys present every day.平均来说

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of the word “average”

. average adj.平均的

verb .平均，均分。

Noun.平均数，平均值。

C. Complete the following sentences：

1.What is ______________(平均的年龄)the students in your class?

2.平均来说,每年大约有400人死于这种疾病.

On average 400 people die of the disease every year.

3.Temperatures in winter are __________ for the time of year.( 低于平均值) （below average ）

III. date

A. Present the following sentences.

1. What is date today? (日期 )

2. The vase is of an earlier date than that one.（时代）

3. Has the date for the meeting been fixed? （日期）

4. The boy asked her for a date, but was refused. （约会）

5. They’ve been dating for months and know each other better than before. （ 谈恋爱）

6. Don’t forget to date your letter. （注明日期）

7. Young people’s clothes date quickly nowadays, so if you want to be fashionable you have to keep a close eye on fashion.（过时，不流行）.

8. The property of the family dates from the war.（始于，追溯到）

9. The castle dates back to the 15th century. （始于，追溯到）

10. The information is out of date; you need to get the latest news.（过期了）

11. She likes to wear clothes that are up to date（.新式的, 现代的）

B. Ss read the sentences and point out the part of speech of the word

“date” and the meaning of the word and phrases.

date : 1) noun . 日期，时代，约会, 流行.

2）verb. 谈恋爱,注明日期, 过时,不流行. 始于，追溯到

C. Complete the following sentences

1. This kind of clothes is ______________.不流行了( out of date)

2. The church __________________. 始建于13 世纪.( dates back to / dates from the 13 century.)

3. Would you like to ___________ (定个日期开个舞会.)( fix a date for a party.)

IV. cover

A . Present the following sentences.

1. The small town which covers five square miles is famous for its

beautiful scenery. 占地

2. Not having been cleaned for a month, the desk was covered with

dust. 布满

3. Hundreds of reporters were sent to cover the Olympic Games held

in Greece. 采访

4. The noise was so loud that she covered her ears with her hands遮蔽

5. The doctor’s talk covered the complete history of medicine. 涉及

6. I can cover 100 miles before it gets dark. 走一段路

7. Will cover the cost of a new shirt? 够付…钱

8. He always keeps a cover over his car. 覆盖物

9. May I have a look at the book whose cover is blue? 封面

B. Read the sentences above and pay attention to the meaning of the

word “cover”.

Cover : Verb占地,布满,采访, 遮蔽,涉及, 走一段路,够付…钱

noun 覆盖物,封面

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. Do you know _______________________. ( 这个国家占地多少) (how much the country covers )

2. His desk ___________________________ ( 堆满了书). ( is covered with books)

3. Who will be sent to __________________________ ( 采访这次运动会)？ ( cover the sports meeting)

4. His book, _______________________ ( 封面是绿色), was a birthday gift from his mother. ( whose cover is green / the cover of which is green)

V. dress

A. present the following sentences.

1. Jim isn’t old enough to dress himself. ( 穿衣服)

2. How long does it take you to dress yourself? 穿衣

3. He has to dress well in his position. 穿戴

4. She was in special dress for the ceremony. 套装

5. She was wearing a silk dress. 连衣裙

B. Read and observe the sentences and point out how the word dress is used.

C. Present more sentences with similar phrases and tell the differences.

1. He was dressed in white and was easy to be recognized in the crowd.

2. He put on his coat and went to the cinema.

3. The emperor had nothing on when he thought he was in his new clothes.

4. Nobody is allowed to wear a beard in that village.

5. What shall I wear to attend her birthday party?

6. she was all in black.

D. Choose the right phrase to complete the following sentences.

1. She was ___________ the white _______ her mother bought for her yesterday. ( wearing, dress)

2. Don’t forget to _________ your hat, or you’ll get burnt. ( put on)

3. We are going to be late. Please get __________ quickly. ( dressed)

4. The child is too small to _____________ himself. ( dress)

5. Do you think I need to ___________ any jewellery to attend her wedding? ( wear )

6. On Children’s Day, the children _____their best clothes ______. (have…on )

7. The girl _____ red is my former student.( in )

VI. find

A. Present the following sentences.

1. The most amazing find was two gold earrings.

2. The old painting is quite a find.

3. I found a ten-dollar bill on the road.

4. I found him asleep on the sofa.

5. Please find the key for me. = Please find me the key.

6. When a waiter asks a customer, “ How do you find the soup?” He wants to know what the customer thinks of the soup.

7. I find it difficult to understand this film.

8. I was disappointed to find him out.

9. After school I always find him waiting at the school gate.

10. The poor man found his house broken into.

11. You should find out the answer by yourself.

B. Read the sentences, and pay attention to how “find” is used.

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. ______________________________ ( 最有趣的发现) was two dolls lying in the drawer. ( The most interesting find)

2. ____________________________ ( 你觉得这个演讲怎么样？) ( How do you find the speech? )

3. He ___________________________ ( 发现很容易) to get along with his new classmates. ( finds it easy)

4. Whenever he comes back from school, he always _________________________________ ( 发现他的狗坐在门外) waiting for him. ( finds his dog sitting outside)

5. When he woke up the next morning, _________________________________ ( 他发现屋外的世界完全地改变了). ( found the world outside completely changed)

Unit20. Grammar

1. Teaching Goal:

Review the use of “it”. Let students learn how to use “it” by doing some practice in reading, writing and so on.

2. Teaching important points:

The usages of it in different situations.

3. Teaching difficult points:

How to teach the students to master the usages of it

4. Teaching methods:

Observe the materials given to them, generalize from the different examples.

5. Teaching aids:

a projector , a blackboard and paper

6. Teaching procedures:

Step1 Lead in.

Read the following the sentences, and pay your attention to the meaning and the function of “it” in each sentence.

1. It is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. Textbook (P3)

2. With the right kind of body, it is possible to float around in the ocean. (P20)

3. Isn’t it amazing that a single substance can be so important to our planet and even the whole universe. (P20)

4. It is very relaxing to take a dip in the pool in summer. (P37)

5. It was during the “ Match on Washington DC” in 1963 that he gave the speech “ I have a dream”. (P28)

6. It was also in Atlanta that one of the great leaders of the Civil Rights Movement, Dr Martin Luther King, Jr, was born. (P44)

7. Zhongguanchun made it possible for him to follow his dreams and help the country he loves. (P3)

8. -“Relying on science, technology and knowledge to increase economic power” makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. (P4)

9. It was through trade and cultural links that European culture and new techniques were brought to Britain.

10. It has been proved that the copper knives came from the places as distance as Spain and western France.

Step 2 Learn the usages of “it” according to the following sentences, dialogues, and exercises.

1. -Where is your car?

-It is in the garage.

(指提到过的或正在谈论的动物或事情)

2. The young couple has a newborn baby. Do you know it is a boy or a girl?

(父母不会用it来指自己的孩子。it可以不区别他们的性别)

3. -It is seven o’clock. There is a knock at the door. Who is it?

-It is the milkman.

4. -Oh, by the way, there was a telephone call for you. Who was it?

-It was my Mum on the phone.

( it可以用来指时间，有人敲门，确认某人为何人，在电话里)

5. It is raining a whole day. It is perfectly cool. It has been a long time since the last rain.

(it可以用来谈论时间，日期，距离，天气等，但要作主语)

6. My grandmother kept telling me that I should help her with housework, but it didn’t help.

(it指前面的整个内容，即：祖母喋喋不休地让我帮助她做些家务)

7. It is no use quarrelling with such a man.

It’s hard for them to answer such difficult questions.

It seems that I have made the same mistake once again.

It is unclear what we should do next week.

It is reported that another big earthquake will happen in the area soon.

It will take you three hours to fly to Hong kong from Beijing.

(it作形式主语)

Exercise:

⑴. Is ______ necessary to finish the composition before May Day.

A. this B. that C. it D. he

⑵. Does ______ matter if I can’t finish the composition before May Day?

A. this B. that C. he D. it

⑶. ______ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.

A. There B. This C. That D. It

⑷. In fact ______ is a hard job for the police to keep order in an football match.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

⑸. It worried her a bit ______ her was turning grey.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

( Keys ⑴ C ⑵ D ⑶ D ⑷ D ⑸ B )

8. He is a heavy smoker. I find it difficult to persuade him to give up smoking.

We soon make it a rule to walk two miles a day.

We take it for granted that water is free at restaurants.

I don’t like it when you shout at your parents.

I don’t feel it my duty to do so.

I hate it when people talk with their mouths full.

(形式宾语)

Exercise:

⑴. They have made ______ a rule ______ in the room.

A. this; not to smoke B. it; smoking

C. it; to not smoke D. it; not to smoke

⑵. I don’t think ______ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑶. The chairman thought ______ necessary to invite professor Smith to speak at the meeting.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑷. I think ______ to finish the work in such a short time is quite impossible.

A. it B. that C. this D. with

⑸ Don’t ______ that all those who get good grades in the entrance examination will prove to be most successful.

A. take as granted B. take this for granted

C. take that for granted D. take it for granted

(Keys: ⑴ D ⑵ D ⑶ B ⑷ B ⑸D )

9. 1). It was Tom who / that broke the window.

2). It was her whom you should ask.

3). It was because Li Ping was ill that he didn’t come to school last week.

4). It was where you come from that you should return to.

5). It was as you like that you must do everything.

6). It was not until 1920 that regular radio broadcasts began

7). It was in the library that was founded by Mr. Willians

that they finished reading the famous novel.

8). It was neither you nor he that is willing to go the park.

9). It was not only you but also he that is willing to go to the Great Wall.

10). It was his coming that made all of us very happy.

Exercise

⑴ It was the ability to the job ________ matters not where you come from or what you are.

A. one B. that C. what D. it

⑵ I have already forgotten _________ you put the dictionary.

A. that it was where B. where it was that

C. where was it that D. that where was it.

⑶ Was it _________ Sandy’s carelessness _________ your keys were all lost.

A. because; which B. for; what

C. because of; that D. since; why

⑷ It was not long _______ he was born ________ his mother died.

A. before; that B. since; when

C. until; when D. after that

⑸ It was in the factory ________ was owned by Mr. White ______ they learned a lot from the workers.

A. that; where B. which; that

C. what; that D. which; where

⑹ ______ was it in 1979 ______ I graduated from the University.

A. That; that B. It; that

C. That; when D. It; when

⑺ It was not until he finished all his homework _______ to bed last night.

A. did he go B. when he went

C. that he went D. then he went

⑻ ＿＿ Where did you meet Johnson?

＿＿ It was in the hotel ______ he stayed.

A. that B. where C. when D. while

(Keys: ⑴ B ⑵ B ⑶ C ⑷ A ⑸ B ⑹ B ⑺ C ⑻ B

10. 1. It is time for school.

2. It is time to go to school.

3. It is time for us to go to school.

4. It is time that we went to school.

综合练习:

1. It wasn’t until nearly a month later ______ I received the manager’s reply.

A. since B. when C. as D. that

2. Can ______ be in the desk ______ you have put my letter?

A. it; which B. I; where C. you; in which D. it; that

3. - ______ that he managed to get the information?

- Oh, a friend of his helped him.

A. Where was it B. What was it

C. How was it D. Why was it

4. It is what you do rather than what you say ______ matters?

A. that B. what C. which D. this

5. It was some time ______ we realized the true.

A. when B. until C. since D. before

6. It was in the lab ______ was taken charge of by professor Zhang ______ they did the experiment.

A. when; that B. which; where C. that; where D. which; that

7. I like ______ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.

A. this B. that C. it D. one

8. - He was nearly drowned once.

- when was ______?

- ______ was in when he was in middle school.

A. that; It B. this; This C. this; It D. that; This

(Keys: 1 D 2 D 3 C 4 A 5 D 6 D 7 C 8 A

Unit20. Integrating skills

Roots of Chinese Culture

Teaching aims:

1. Help the students get the general idea of the text.

2. Help students know the importance of the relics and have correct sense to protect them.

3. Teach the students how to create a flow chart.

Teaching procedures:

VII. Step1. Lead-in

Show students some pictures of unearthed objects in Snxingdui, and ask them questions such as: Have you seen the pictures? What do you think of them? When and where were they found?

VIII. Step2. Fast reading

Ask the students to read the text quickly and them summarize the main idea of the text.

Paragraph1. The discovery of Jinsha Relics.

Paragraph2. The similarities between Jinsha Relics and Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph3. The importance of the discovery of Jinsha Ruins Relics.

Paragraph4.The discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph5. The importance of the discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Step3. Careful reading

1. Ask the students to listen and read paragraph by paragraph and then do the exercises.

Paragraph1.

1. What kind of special relics were unearthed in Jinsha Ruins?

2. Why could they take the archaeologists’ attention?

Because the ivory and animal bones found in Jinsha Village are important ,they will serve as important materials for the study of local geography, climate and the environment in ancient times.

3. Who was the first to discover the Jinsha Ruins and when?

Construction workers from a local company found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building road there on February 8, .

Paragraph2.

Why is cong special?

Because it was not made in Sichuan, but was transported there, which proved that Sichuan had trade links with the Yangtze and Yellow River valleys at that time.

Paragraph3.

What is the significance of the discoveries in Jinsha Village?

The discoveries there proves that the history of Sichuan is much longer than 2300 years.

Paragraph4.

True or false:

1. Sanxingdui Ruins were first discovered by farmers.

2. The farmers hesitated about whether to give the relics to the state.

3.The local teachers and officials persuaded them to turn in the relics.

Paragraph5.

1. Since 1920, what have been unearthed in Sanxingdui Ruins Site?

More than 10,000 relics dating back to between 5000 BC and 3000 BC have been discovered. 53 holes were dug up and over 1,200 pieces, including bronze and gold masks, bronze objects and images, jade and ivory had been found.

2. What do archaeologists hope to discover in the future?

They hope to discover some of the mysterious palaces, tombs of kings and bronze and jade workshops.

True or false:

1. From 1929 to 1986, 53 holes were dug and over 1200 pieces of objects were found.

2. Today, the work in Sanxingdui has already been done.

2. Then let students to fill in the blanks.

What’s the link between Jinsha Ruins and Sanxingdui Ruins?

Civilizations Jinsha Ruins Sanxingdui Ruins

time

Who found it

Objects found

3. Reading comprehension.

1. The passage suggests that ______.

A. Jinshan Relics and Sanxingdui Relics were found by chance

B. archaeologists knew there were a lot of treasures there long ago

C. Yan Kaizong is not a patriot.

D. archeologists will never find another relics again.

2. Which of the following statements is right according to the text?

A. Jinsha had no trade links with other areas.

B. The ivory and animal bones found at Jinsha are of no real value.

C. Sichuan has a history of more than 2300 years.

D. Many of the relics at Jinsha have no connection with those found at Sanxingdui.

3. At Jinsha Relics, archaeologists found_________.

A. gold and jade

B. bronze and stone objects

C. many ivories

D. all of the above

4. Archaeologists are scientists who_______.

A.study nature

B. do research on animals

C. study the buried remains of ancient times

D. give instructions to students

5. We can infer from the passage that ________.

A. China has a long history with a rich culture

B. Yan Kaizong kept the relics found by his grandfather as his own

C. since 1986, archaeologists have stopped digging at Jinsha Relics

D. Sanxingdui Relics was first discovered by archaeologist

Keys: A C D C A

IX. Step4. Discussion

1. Why do you think the text is titled with “Roots of Chinese Culture” instead of “Sanxingdui Ruins”?

2. Do you think Yan Kaizong was foolish? Why?

X. Step5. Writing

1. After construction workers found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building roads there, what steps and decisions did they take? Then the teacher lists the all the steps and decisions on the blackboard.

2. Ask the students to decide in which order steps and decisions were taken.

3. Ask the students to create different shapes for different types for action, for example: triangles for decisions, circles for the discoveries, boxes for things that are going on and diamonds when calling in other people.

4. Then ask the students to draw the arrows to show the direction of the flow.

5. Ask the students to check for missing steps.

6. Just now we have made a poster showing a flow chart of “Jinsha Village”, can you make a poster showing a flow chart of “something has been stolen”? Please make it yourselves.

7. Please check your answer with the chart on page 80.

8. Ask the students to make a poster showing a flow chart of the things you should do when you have discovered some old things in the ground.

Example:

高一英语课件 篇8

Period 1

(一)明确目标

1. To make the students creative and thinkable

2. Describe things and how they work.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Every day, we see and get in touch with a lot of things. But have you ever made any sense of how these things work and how many ways they can be used in our every life?

Fox example: a piece of chalk

Excellent, now we’ll see what our text wants us to say on page 57.

(三)教学过程

Step2 speaking

Next I’ll show you something for you to think over to see how many ways you can think of them which are used in our life.

The teacher shows practicalities on the screen using the projector, such as a toothpick, a sock and a plastic bag etc. show the students as many others as you would like.

Ask the students to say as many as they can. And collect those key works from the students on the blackboard.

Step3 talk box

Here on the screen you can see a talk box with some letters in. you are wanted to make as many words as you can by moving the sides of the box. And you can move any side as many steps as you wish.

For example :(to show them the way of moving the sides of the first and last to form the word “stop”.

Suggested answer stop, step, item, door date, room

(四)总结,扩张

Step 4 true or false

Show these three questions on the screen or just ask the students to turn to this page to read them.

Ask the students to get their answers by discussing them in pairs or groups of 4…

(1) The word “boat” can be spelled using four of the letters from the word “automobile” (true)

(2) 11 minutes past 5 o’clock, is 48 minutes before 6 o’clock. (False)

(3) If you turn a left-handed glove inside out it will fit on a fight hand. (It depends on what kind of gloves you are having. If it is a thread glove, it is true. It is a leather one, it is false.)

Step5 practice

Speak about the use of the following things. You may find the pictures of these practicalities and show them to the students on the screen.

A. a pencil B. a schoolbag C. an empty bottle D. a computer E. a desk

(五)随堂练习

Read the following passage and answer the question after discussing them in pairs

Disk Doctor

What can you if you lose the data from your disks? To find an expert, who would recover the lost information for you, is the easiest solution. Jack Olson is one of these experts, jack and a few of his friends set up a company called “jack’s disk doctor service” in 1984.They work from home and give all the money they earn to charity. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that they send extra money to jack or the charities his company supports. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that sent extra money to jack or to the charities his company supports, one oil company offered him ,000 for his help and an architect even sent him a blank check.

It would be difficult to put a value on the things rescued by the Disk Doctor. There have been disks containing medical research, television scripts, manuscripts of whole books, a lawyer’s papers for a court case and even Margaret Thatcher’s travel plan for a visit to eastern Europe. For this last case, jack had to go in person to Thatcher’s office “for security reasons”.

Disk is usually sent to the disk doctor by post, but some times people are in such a hurry that they can’t wait for the mail to come. For example, some radio scripts had to be rushed by taxi to jack’s house because they were needed for broadcasting the next day. When the material has been recovered, the disk is returned to the sender with a diagnosis and a prescription for avoiding the problem in the future, One grateful client, an author, put a “Thank you” to jack in the front of his book saved me from a heart attack,” he wrote.” but,”says jack “most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”

1. Why did the architect sent jack a blank check?

A. the architect did not have any money.

B. the architect did it for security reasons

C. the architect always followed the doctor’s advice

D. the architect thought jack’s service was priceless.

2. Which of the following statements is not true?

A. jack’s disk doctor service has only one standard fee.

B. jack and his company have made a fortune for their service.

C. Margaret Thatcher is a very important person.

D. jack’s clients are from all talks of life .

3. From the statement “but …most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”. We can infer that ____

A. most people don’t take medicine regularly

B. many of jack’s patients would probably get sick again

C. many of jack’s clients have sought for his help more than once

D. most people don’t read the instruction when using a computer

Suggested answer 1.D2.B3.C

Step6 homework

Finish off the exercises in the workbook

Period2

(一)明确目标

To learn the listening and speaking of the text.

To learn how to give advice and make suggestions.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hi class. Yesterday we talked something about everyday little things. Now I’d like you to listen to some descriptions of other little things we use in our everyday life. Listen to them carefully and then tell me they are about.

(三)教学过程

Step2 listening

Now it’s your turn .think about the objects we use in our every day life. Describe two or three of the objects to your classmate and see if he she can guess what you are describing. Don’t make it too easy to guess. These questions can help you with your descriptions.

Show the students those suggested sentences on the screen. Ask the students to work in pairs.

(四)总结,扩展

Step3 speaking

Jane wants to buy a cell phone (mobile phone. Canadians use it mostly.) Please give your advice or suggestions about the idea as the different poles (Jane ,Jane’s best friend, Jane’s mother and Jane’s father ) suggested in the textbook. Ask them to work in groups of four. They check the answers they get for each pole they play.

Show the students the oral English about advice and suggestions in the screen.

You’d better (not ) do…

You should /ought to do ….

You need (to)…

I suggested that…

What /how you ….?

Why not …?

Why don’t you …?

Step4 practice

Work in groups of four. Decide which role each group member should play and then take a few minutes to prepare the role cards. Report your decision to the class when you have finished the decision.

Suggested answer

There are no stable answers. Encourage the students to say as much as possible.

Step5 practice

Talk in groups of 4 about the ideas for gifts for grandfather, then ask two pairs to act out their dialogue in the front.

Gifts for grandfather

Hello. My grandfather in turning 70shortly, having a big party etc. I’d like to give him something special somehow related to his granddaughter (that is me ) who is 16yesrs old .Does any one have any great ideas? Some ideas I have …a garden stone with her hand and foot prints: a pillow with her picture on it …stuff like that. Thanks…

Step6 home work

1.开放作文

2. Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

Period3

（一）明确目标

To understand the passage and finish those post-reading questions

To learn the grammer…present continuous passive voice.

（二）整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hello class, how you keep in touch with your parents or good friends.

Quite good. Telephones make our life so convenient. Mostly you keep in touch with others by phone. Can you imagine the days without telephones now?

Have you ever used a cell phone? Do any of your classmates have cell phones?

（三）教学过程

Step2 pre-reading

You did quite well now. next I want you have a discussion about the following questions in groups of four.

(1) How is the way we live today different from life in the pas?

(2) How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life .(show them the following words on the blackboard or on the screen to help the students to go on with their discussion if possible.)

Post house postcard, telephone, cell phone, cell phone

(3) why the things like cell phones, computers and TV so popular?

Step3 reading

Read the text as fast as possible, then say ture or false to the follow sentences.

⑴Wang mei will be back home 10 minutes later.

⑵We may talk to any one who also has a cell phone in his pocket.

⑶Now cell phones can be used as cameras, but not to sent email or stuff the internet.

⑷Some important days can be reminded about by the earliest cell phones.

⑸Some students disobey the rules and using their phones in the classroom.

⑹John’s parents gave him a cell phone as a Christmas gift, but don’t let him use it in school.

⑺Wang mei calls her best friends at least once a day.

Suggest answer

TTFFFFT

Step4 listening

Listen to the text and then answer the following questions.

(1) What does the title “life on the go” mean?

(2) Why do some schools not let students use cell phones? Do you agree?

(3) Why do teenagers like cell phones so much?

(4) wang mei says that cell phones are the most useful invention ever. Do you agree? Which invention do you think is the useful? Why?

Suggested answer:

⑴a busy life.

⑵If a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work.

⑶We have a need to stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing. Having a cell phones also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency. It is cool and a way to fun, too.

Step5 further reading

Reading the second paragraph of the text and tell us the general meaning of it.

(The factions of the modern cell phones, / cell phones can be used for many things.)

Step6 practice

Post-reading

Look at the outline and fill in the banks. Finally check the answer individually.

(1)略

(2) Cell phone can be used for many things.

Cell phones male it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere words and images are sent throughout the world. The latest cell phones have features such as games, music and electronic calendar that will remind you about appointments and important dates.

(3) Problems

A. In schools: if a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work..

B. At home: parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.

(4) Reasons:

A. We have a need t stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing.

B. Having a cell phone also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency.

C. The cell phone is not only a useful too but also a way to have fun and be cool.

(5) Wang Mei’s explanation.

(四)总结,扩展

step7 think and act

Design you favorite cell phones.

Read the request loudly to the students to make sure what they are wanted to do. Ask the students to work in pair or groups of four. Several minutes later, ask them to show their designs and make some necessary explanations.

Step8 language study

Word study. Match the words and phrases on the left with their meaning on the right.

Step9 grammar

(1) The present continuous passive voice

现在进行时的被动语态: be + being + done,表示某件事情正在被进行之中, 如:

This question is being discussed at the meeting.

The children are being taken care of by the aunt.

(2) Practice

Do the exercise in part 1& 2 on page 61.

Suggested answer

Part1

(1)Money is being collected for the broadband project.

⑵A report about the negative effects of cell phones is being written I school.

⑶A computer center is being built for the students

⑷Their test-tube baby is being taken good care of by the parents.

⑸Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

⑹The laws are being revised to protect the fights of women and children.

Part2

⑴How much money is being spent a month on their cell phones?

⑵What is /are being produced by this factory?

⑶Who is being interviewed for the job?

⑷What are being sent to his friend’s phone?

⑸What are being developed for the human resource department of their company?

（五)随堂练习

Step10 discussing questions about the safety of using a cell phone.

(1) What about children using wireless phones?

(2) Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions?

(3) Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from RF radiation work?

Period4

(一)明确目标

Put much stress on the writing after reading the passage.

Ask the students to write a short passage to AXL as the text demands us to do.

(二)整体感知

Step1 lead in

Have you thought of anything about the future of the earth?

What will the man’s future be like?

What is the most thing that man worries about the developing computers? What is your idea about it?

(三教学过程

Step2 read the text quietly and answer the following questions.

(1) Who ruled the earth in the year 2374?

(2) What is the leader of the humans decided to do ?

(3) Do you think that humans and machines can live peacefully together in the future?

Suggested answer

(1) The earth is ruled by a great computer named AXL.

(2) The leader of the humans has decided to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people back together, and make the world beautiful again.

Step3 listen to the passage .then try to fill in the following blanks.

But there is ____ hope. The human beings have been able to keep a small, secret school ___ since the machines took_____. In this school, the students still learn____ all the wonders of the world-science art history .culture and they are still allowed to dream about a ___ future. The leader of the humans has decided that it is time to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people___ together, and make the world ____ again. A group of experts were asked to solve the problem, but they failed. Now, the leader has asked a group of students to do what they can) ____ save the earth.

Suggested answer still open over about better back beautiful to

Step4 discussion

Discuss the following topic in group of 4first, and then ask someone individually to report what they discussed in class.

(1) How do you think of the love and friends in the world?

Have you ever experienced such love and friendship?

Would you tell us your story?

Step5 writing

Write a letter to AXL on the following points:

Tell AXL who you are and why you are writing this letter

Tell AXL about love and friendship

---Explain how love and friendship will make the world better.

---Give examples of how love and friendship will make the world better.

Step7 home work

Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

高一英语课件 篇9

Teaching aims & demands:

To develop students’ ability of reading a play

To know about American family life and problems that happen between American teenagers and their parents

To form a positive attitude towards solving problems between teenagers and parents

Teaching procedures:

(1). a dirty or untidy state _______

(2). give a reason for something _______

(3). believe that somebody is good_______

(4). something worthless or of low quality_______

(5). a person between a child and a grown-up _______

(7). without being punished_______

Talk about the four pictures on P21

List some problems with parents.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

(2) How to solve these problems.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

Please go through the Reading strategy and tell how to read a play.

1.It is often in the form of ___ _________.

2.It usually includes_________ ______, and each act can have_________ _______.

3.The words or speeches in a play are very________, and some of the words in a sentence are______ _____.

4.There are some helpful _____________in a play.

5.It should be_____ ________.

Get students to read the play and finish Part A individually.

How many acts are there in this play? And how many scenes in each act?

1. Listening and complete C1 on P24.

2. Please read Act One of the play carefully and fill in the form

Characters Things they do Feelings

2. Please read Act Two carefully and fill in form:

Characters Things they do Feelings

1. This passage is mainly about ________.

A. what Mom and Dad did after they returned from vacation.

B. what Daniel and Eric did at home.

C. the reason why the dog was tired and hungry

D. a big quarrel that an American family had

2. Mom and Dad left Daniel in charge at home because ______.

A. he was an adult B. he was the youngest

D. they thought he could take good care of everything while they were away.

3. Which is NOT true according to the passage?

A. The children were very excited when their parents came back a day earlier than expected.

B. The children didn’t use the money for themselves.

C. Daniel was left in charge at home while their parents were away.

D. Eric wanted to tell his parents what had happened, but Daniel said they didn’t need to.

4. The main reason for their quarrel is that ______.

A. Daniel was too rude.

B. Eric didn’t tell his parents what had happened

C. the parents blamed Daniel without giving him a chance to explain

D. Daniel and Eric didn’t behave well at home.

Fill the missing words in the blanks to complete the summary of the play.

Mom and Dad arrived back from v_______ earlier than e_______ in order to give the boys a s_______. They got so a____. When they saw the house was in a m___ that Dad shouted at D____, the elder brother, who was in c______ of the house when they were away. Daniel s_______ the door to show his anger, because their parents never gave him a c_____ to explain. E___, the younger brother, wanted to explain to his parents what had h_______, but Daniel didn't think that their parents d______ to know the truth.

At the end of the play, both Mom and Dad thought maybe they were too h___on the boys. However, Dad decided to p_____ Daniel for his rudeness so that he would show r_____ for his parents in future.

1. If you were Eric or Daniel ,what will you do?

2. Find some adj. to describe good parents in your eyes.

They should be__________, __________, __________,__________...

3. How do you deal with the relationship between you and your parents?

We should _______, ________, _______, ________...our parents.

3. The word “family” means “f_______ a_____ m______ I l_____ y_____”.

1. Role-play the dialogue in groups of five.

(Divide students into groups of five and one is the narrator and the others are the main characters. Role-play Act One and Act Two.)

There are three kinds of goals: short-term, medium-range and long-term goals.

Short-term goals are those that usually deal with current (当前的)activities, which we can apply on a daily basis. Such goals can be achieved in a week or less, or two weeks, or possibly months. It should be remembered that just as a building is no stronger than its foundation, our long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals. Upon completing our short-term goals, we should date the occasion and then add new short-term goals that will build on those that have been completed.

The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals. They might deal with just one term of school or the entire school year, or they could even extend for several years. Any time you move a step at a time, you should never allow yourself to become discouraged or overwhelmed. As you complete each step, you will enforce the belief in your ability to grow and succeed. And as your list of completion dates grow, your motivation （动力）and desire（欲望） will increase.

Long-term goals may be related to our dreams of the future. They might cover five years or more. Life is not a static thing. We should never allow a long-term goal to limit（限制） us or our course of action.

1. Our long-term goals mean a lot ________.

A. if we cannot reach solid short-term goals

B. if we complete the short-term goals。

C. if we have dreams of the future

2. New short-term goals are built upon________.

A. a daily basis B. your achievement in a week

C. current activities D. the goals that have been completed

3. When we complete each step of our goals, _____________.

A. we will win final success B. we are overwhelmed

C. we should build up confidence of success

D. we should have strong desire for setting new goals

4. What is the main idea of this passage? _____________

A. Life is dynamic thing. B. We should set up long-term goals.

C. Different kinds of goals in life. D. The limitation of long-term goals.

5. Which of the following statements is wrong according to the passage? _____________

A. The long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals.

B. The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals.

C. Life is a static thing, thus we should never allow a long-term goal to limit us or our course of action.

D. We should often add new short-term goals to those which have been completed.

高一英语课件 篇10

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

ic话题:

1>Talk about science and technology

2>Describe things and how they work

3>Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

4>Talk about new inventions

ction功能:

Agreement and disagreement 同意和不同意:

Absolutely. I disagree. / Well, yes, but …

That’s exactly what I was thinking. I’m afraid I don’t agree.

That’s a good point. You can’t be serious.

That’s just how I see it. Well, it depends. That’s worth thinking about.

I would have to disagree with that. Well, I’m not so sure about that.

3.vocabulary词汇:

toothpick, agreement, disagreement, disagree, absolutely, depend, press, teenager, throughout, add, latest, calendar, remind, appointment, behaviour, obey, dare, emergency, whatever, dial, according, unexpected, particular, negative, clone, interview, department, electricity, planet, wonder, defeat, force, peaceful, succeed, skip

stay in touch with, call for, in case (of…), according to, take over, break down

4.grammar语法:

The Present Continuous Passive Voice (3) 被动语态:

1>用英语描述事物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

New functions are being added to the phones.

Michael is being interviewed for the job.

Modern cellphones are being used as camera and radios.

2>用英语描述人物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

The new student is being introduced to the class.

Look! The children are being led into the garden.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕新科技、新技术和新发明这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Life on the go” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction This activity provides a good opportunity to talk about creativity and to practise problem-solving skills.

Instruction When the students have solved the problems, ask them how they did it and compare different solutions. Ask the students what creativity is and if it is possible to learn how to be creative.

Answers:

Useful Things Various answers are possible. Encourage the students to think of as many uses as possible. It is not important if the new use is useful in the conventional sense, the emphasis here is on having students explain why / how it will be useful.

Talk box Various combinations are possible. Examples: 1st row left to right: stop, side, soot, stem. 2nd row left to right: coat, code, cram. 3rd row left to right: aide, atom. 4th row left to right: pram, poor. Students can also go right to left and diagonally - the more ways the better. Again, the emphasis is on having students explain their choices and solutions. The activity is not about getting the “right” answer.

True or False Answers: T-F-T. Ask the students how they came up with the answer and encourage them to think of more true or false questions.

Extension Ask the students to come up with more creativity tests.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The students will hear descriptions of everyday objects and are asked to try to guess what is being described. The exercise will be more useful and interesting if you encourage the students to move beyond the obvious uses of the objects described.

Instruction Tell the students to listen to the tape and try to guess what is being described. Before they listen to the tape, you can ask them to describe an everyday object (or you can bring two or three objects and describe them). When the students have listened to the tape and guessed what's being described, they can work in pairs or groups to discuss how the objects can be used. Encourage the students to think of new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses.

Extension Ask the students to think about other objects that either fit the description or can be used for the same things.

LISTENING TEXT:

1 These are very simple. Two sticks, about 20 centimetres long. They are usually made of wood. You hold the two sticks in one hand. You put one stick between two of your fingers, and you hold the other one with your thumb. These things can be difficult to use at first, but you will soon learn how to pick up even small pieces of food.

2 This thing is very popular and useful. Almost everyone has one these days. You can see people using this thing on the bus, when they are walking, or at home. It is usually small, about the same size as your hand, and it comes in many colours. There are several buttons on it, some for numbers, others for other things. It can be put in your pocket or in a small bag. With it, you can talk to people far away.

3 This is a large box with a big door. If you open the door, a light comes on and you can see what's inside. You'd better not leave the door open for too long, because it is not good for the things inside. You might catch a cold, too, if you stand in front of the open door. There are several shelves inside, some in the box itself, some in the door. You usually find this large box. in the kitchen.

Answers to Exercise 1:

Object described Possible uses

I Chopsticks Eating, opening a bottle. Students can think of more creative uses.

2 Cellphone Making phone calls, sending pictures, sending e-mails. Students think of more.

3 Refrigerator Keeping food fresh, keeping drinks cool. Students think of more.

Answers to Exercise 2:

Various answers are possible.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction This group discussion is an opportunity for the students to practise their ability to express, support, and challenge an opinion. Jane wants to buy a cellphone, but before she buys one she wants to know what her parents and her friend think. The students will role-play the discussion.

Instruction Divide the students into groups and explain that they are going to prepare a role play and have a discussion. Each group member will play one of the roles and must prepare a role card. If necessary, you can use one of the role cards as an example. Explain the “rules” of the discussion to the students and remind them of the basic classroom rules.

1 Decide who will play which role. The student who plays Jane will be the group leader.

2 Give the group enough time to prepare the role cards.

3 Check that all group members are ready. Before the students begin the discussion, remind them that Jane should open the discussion and that they should take turns introducing themselves and stating their opinion as outlined in 4 and 5.

4 Jane opens the meeting by welcoming everybody. She also explains why they are meeting and asks everyone to help her make her decision.

5 Each group member introduces himself / herself and states his or her opinion and reasons.

6 When all the group members have introduced themselves and stated their opinions and reasons, the students can continue the discussion as they see fit. They can ask questions, give more examples and reasons, explain their opinions, and debate and challenge other views.

7 Remind the students that each group member must try to make the others agree with him or her.

Possible answers:

Jane

1 I can use a cellpho_e to call my parents if I am late.

2 I can use a cellphone to call for help.

3 I can use a cellphone to stay in touch with my friends. Jane's best friend

1 we don't really need cellphones.

2 we are not allowed to use cellphones in school.

3 it is better to use the money for something more important.

Jane's mother

1 cellphones are too expensive.

2 Jane should not spend too much time on the phone.

3 Jane is too young to have a cellphone. Jane's father

1 if Jane has a cellphone, I can always find out where she is.

2 a cellphone will help Jane feel safe.

3 Jane can use a cellphone send messages to her friends.

Sample discussion:

JANE: Thank you for taking the time to talk with me. Mum, Dad, you know I have told you before that I want to buy a cellphone. I would like to tell you why I want to buy one, and I would like your advice.

DAD: OK, why don't you start and then we will all tell you what we think.

JANE: Thanks, Dad. I think a cellphone is very useful, because I can use it to let you know where I am and when I will be back home. For example, if I have to stay late at school, you might get worried and wonder where I am. If I have a cellphone, I can call you and tell you that I will be late. .

MUM: Well, that's true, but I don't think you should buy a cellphone. In my opinion, a cellphone is too expensive. Besides, if you have a cellphone I think you will spend too much time talking on the phone. You'd better use your time to study instead.

CINDY: I agree with Mrs Collins. Some of the other students in our class have cellphones and they talk on the phone all the time. I don't see how they ever have time for anything else. And it is expensive. One of my classmates said that she spent 110 yuan in one month!

DAD: Jane, I think you are right. I often worry about where you are and I never know when I will be home from work. I remember last year, when you were at the supermarket and I had promised to pick you up. I was late and couldn't find you when I got there. If you have a cellphone I can just call you.

JANE: Thank you for telling me what you think. I will take some time to think about what you have said. Now let's have some fun. How about playing some cards!

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction The questions are designed to get the students to think about the cellphone as an example of inventions that have changed our way of life.

Instruction Encourage answers and comments that help students think about the way technology affects our life and thinking. The second question will help: students are likely to mention what we do today and compare to what people did in the past. Big inventions would include cars, computers, electricity, etc. The third question will help the students reflect on why some inventions are more popular than others.

Extension Ask the students to think about what “big” inventions have in common. Encourage students to think more about question 3. What are the consequences of “popular” science - will it lead science in the wrong direction?

3. READING

LIFE ON THE GO

Introduction The reading discusses the increasing popularity of cellphones in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life. Encourage the students to take a critical view of the cellphone culture, or life on the go, and think about how trends and life-styles are related to science and technology. Note that Wang Mei (the girl in the text) says that cellphones are useful and repeats the reasons we encounter in ads and the media - but in the last paragraph we also learn that she (like most people) actually uses the cellphone for other, perhaps less grand purposes. .

Note Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go-rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using portable phones, computers, etc.

Instruction

1 Ask the students to read the rust paragraph quickly to get the main idea of the text.

2 Ask the students to do the following (without reading the text).

A Try to guess what the next paragraph will talk about.

Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

B Try to guess what the whole text will talk about. Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

3 Ask the students to use the answers from 2A and 2B to write a simple outline of the text. The students can work in pairs or groups to write the outline.

4 Let the students read the whole text. Ask them to compare their outline with the text and note any differences.

4. POST-READING

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 The title refers to the high pace of modem life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.

2 The text lists a couple of reasons: cellphones can distract students in class, cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework.

3 The text lists two reasons: safety and the cool factor, i.e. the desire to be like others. Students may add other reasons.

4 Students are of course free to agree or disagree. Make sure that the students give reasons for their opinion.

Questions 2 and 3 can be answered by skimming or scanning. For question 1, students may use the pre-reading discussion and their own thinking. The text does include the phrase life on the go, so additional help is available. Question 4 is perhaps best answered after a pair or group discussion.

2 Sample Outline

1 Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cellphones.

2 Cellphones can be used for many things.

For example: talking to people, sending mes5ages and pictures, .playing games, listening to music, keeping appointments

3 Cellphones also cause problems.

1 In school, cellphones may disturb lessons.

2 At home, students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.

4 There are several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.

1 Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.

2 Cellphones make us feel safer.

3 Cellphones are fun and cool.

5 Wang Mei explains why she likes her cellphone and what she uses it for.

3 Various answers are possible.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Read the text fluently.

2. Get LANUAGE STUDY ready.

3. Go on remembering the new words and expressions in this unit.

Period 3

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.

2. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

（Omitted.）

3. LANGUAGE STUDY

Word study

Answers to the exercise:

1G 2C 3B 4A 5F 6I 7E 8D 9H

4. GRAMMAR

The Present Continuous Passive Voice:

To form the present continuous passive voice, use is / are being done, which gives the idea that an action is in progress at the moment.

e.g.: Money is being collected for the broadband project.

A report is being written about the negative effects of 'Cellphones in school.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 Money for the broadband project is being collected.

2 A report about the negative effects of cellphones in school is being written.

3 A computer center for the students is being built.

4 The test-tube baby is being taken good care of by its parents.

5 Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

6 The laws to protect the rights of women and children are being revised.

Answers to Exercise 2:

1 How much money a month is being spent on their cellphones?

2 What is being produced by this company?

3 Who is being interviewed for the job?

4 What is being sent to his friend's phone?

5 Whom are some programmes being developed for?

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Grasp the language points in the reading text.

2. Finish all the exercises in the Student’s Book.

3. Learn to use the Grammar in this unit.

Period 4

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Check the students on the grammar points.

2. Ask the students to translate some sentences.

2. GRAMMAR EXERCISES

(Omitted.)

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Instruction Writing this letter can be difficult as the students will have to struggle with the abstract concepts. Most of them will find it difficult to capture the essence of the abstract terms, but in the process of doing so they will discover useful techniques for conveying their ideas, e.g. giving examples. Acceptable essays should include a rough definition of the two terms (love and friendship), with examples, within the framework of a letter to Q12. Advanced essays should use the definitions / examples to show Q12 that love and friendship are necessary, i.e. advanced essays should use the expository parts to support a persuasive thesis. These are important criteria for assessment. Let the students read the story about Q12 and then write the letter. The students can work individually or in pairs or groups.

Sample writing:

April 3 2374

Dear Q 12,

My name is Xiao Hong and 1 am a middle school student in Dalian. I would like to tell you about two things that 1 think are very important. Please read what 1 have to say, because 1 think it may be helpful to you. 1 want to tell you about love and friendship.

Love is difficult to explain, but 1 will try. Love is a feeling between two people. It is a very happy and warm feeling. When two people love each other, they almost become one person. For example, if a father loves his child, he will feel sad when the child is sad and happy when the childis happy. There are many different kinds of love: you can love your parents or children, you can love your husband or your wife, or you can love someone outside your family.

Friendship is also a kind of love. When two people are friends, they try to understand and help each other. A good friend will be there for you even when you are having a difficult time. Friends do things together and share thoughts, feelings and ideas.

Love and friendship are necessary if we want a happy world. If there is love, people will not do bad things to each other; if we have friends, we won't have to feel lonely or afraid. When people feel lonely and afraid, they often get angry with others and do mean things. If we learn to love and be friends, we can live happily together and solve the problems and difficulties we must face in life.

Your friend,

Xiao Hong

The words “chelyabinsk” and “Irkutsk” may be new to us, but the sentence tells us that they are examples of large Russian cities.

CHECKPOINT

Answers to Checkpoint 9:

A computer centre is being built for the students.

The phones are also being used as cameras and radios. The phones are being used everywhere.

4. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

(Omitted.)

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Write a clear and beautiful short passage in the Exercise-book.

2. Preview WORKBOOK.

Period 5

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of some phrases.

2. Say something about the students’ writing.

2. LISTENING

Instruction Tell the students that they will hear about the International Space Station. Ask the students what they know about it and then let them listen to the tape I and complete the informati0n chart.

LISTENING TEXT:

The International Space Station

As you are listening to this, the International Space Station is moving around the Earth. The International Space Station is an international project to build a small city in space. Sixteen countries are working together to build a space station where scientists can conduct experiments and learn more about space and the earth. The sixteen international partners are the United States, Russia, Canada, Japan, Brazil, and the European Space Agency. The United States and Russia are leading the effort but every country is making an important contribution to the ISS.

The International Space Station is made up of several parts and will be about the size of two soccer fields when completed. The different parts will be added one by one. Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources, and others are for people to live in. The parts will be put together in space. When the new parts have been put together, space station astronauts will perform space walks to connect the parts to the station. The space walks are very dangerous and astronauts must be very careful one small mistake could be deadly! A total of 46 flights

will be necessary to connect the more than 100 parts. If all goes well, the station will be completed in a few years.

Note: The Europen space Agency involves 11 countries: France, Germany, Italy, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden and the UK.

Answers to the exercises:

1

What is the task of the ISS? It is an international project to build the Internationals Space Station, a small city in space.

How many countries are building the station? 16

How big will the ISS be when finished? About the size of two soccer fields.

How many parts are needed? What will they be used for? More than 100.

Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources and others are for people to live in.

How is the ISS being built? First, the different parts will be put together in space. Then, the people who work at the space station will take space walks to connect the parts to the station.

How many flights are needed to connect the parts? 46.

When will the project be finished? In a few years.

2 Various answers are possible.

3. TALKING

Instruction Help the students prepare the lists of advantages and disadvantages. You can use one of the examples and let the whole class think of advantages and disadvantages and then write them on the blackboard. If necessary, you can also model one or two “turns” in the debate.

Technology Advantages Disadvantages

Cellphones ●Cellphones help us keep in touch withour friends and family.

●Cellphones help us send e-mails.

● Cellphones help us send photographs and messages.

. ● Cellphones help us… ●Using a cellphone is expensive.

●Overusing it may disturb our work.

●Spending too much time making phone calls. . Cellphones ...

Robots

●Robots can work in dirty and dangerous places.

●Robots can do boring things that humans do not want to do.

● Robots can work without sleep and food. ●Robots can't think or make decisions.

● People may become unemployed if robots are used instead of humans.

●Robots need electricity.

Computers

●Computers help us work faster.

●Computers can help us study and learn.

●Computers can help us solve difficult problems. ●Computers are expensive.

●Computers can't think or make decisions.

●Computers are sometimes difficult to use.

Sample Dialogue:

A: I think that cellphones have many advantages. They help us keep in touch with our friends and family and we can use them to get important information, like news and weather reports.

B: Well, maybe, but there are many disadvantages, too. Cellphones are expensive to buy and use, and people may use them where they shouldn't, like in the classroom. Many people call their friends just for fun and may end spending too much time on the phone.

A: That may be true for some people, but that's not really because of the phones. You could say the same about TV or computers. People shouldn't do too much of anything. Think about all the other advantages. For example, if I'm meeting my Mum at the bus station and she is late, she can call me and let me know so I won't have to worry or get lost. And if I do get lost, or if I'm in danger, I can call for help.

B: ...

4. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Get ready to be examined in the talking activities.

2. Preview all the exercises in the workbook.

Period 6

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the talking activities.

2. PRACTISING

Vocabulary

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 toothpick 2 Teenagers 3 calendar 4 appointment 5 behaviour 6 emergency

7 interview 8 planet

2 1 answer (n) 2 changes (n) 3 defeat (v) 4 touch (n) 5 hand (n) 6 handed (v)

7 change (v) 8 phone (n) 9 forces (v) 10 phoned (v) 11 force (n) 12 answer (v)

13 defeat (n) 14 touch (v)

3 1 C 2C 3B 4A. 5A

4 1 You may do whatever you want to do.

2 I'll teach whoever wants to learn.

3 We can start whenever you're ready.

4 Life won't be easy whichever road you take.

5 He makes friends wherever he goes.

6 It rained throughout the night.

7 In case of rain, they usually go travelling with an umbrella.

Grammar

Answers to the exercises:

1 done, completed, built, have, collecting, planned, collected, spent, made, being improved, planted, painted

2 National day is coming and People's Park is being prepared for it. Look! By the lake, one boat is being repaired and the other one is being. painted. Beside the boats, the trees are being planted and the flowers are being watered. Not far away, the building is being painted and its roof is being repaired...

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Reading

FUTURE TRAVEL: TELEPORATION

Introduction The text states that the concept of transportation has remained the same despite advances in science and technology. However, recent discoveries suggest that we may be able to change the way we view transportation. The text defines and explains teleportation and reports advances. in science that have made teleportation seem possible. The discovery is an example of how something once believed to be science fiction (or impossible) is becoming science (or reality). It is important to note that while the discovery described in the text is significant, the teleportation of human beings does not seem possible.

Extension Encourage the students to think about what a concept is and how it changes - or, in other words, how the way we think about the world interacts with what we know about it. Use the Adventure Travel reading in the student's book as an example of another conceptual change.

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.

2 With normal transportation, a person or thing is moved from point A to point B. With teleportation, a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.,

3 Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.

4 Various answers are possible. The text does make it clear that it. is very unlikely that human teleportation will become possible.

2 The students are asked to match each new word with the correct strategy. Ask them to scan the text for the word and then decide which strategy they could use to guess the meaning of the word.

Teleportation

Strategy: Some words are made up of two parts. We can use the meaning of each part to guess the meaning of the word.

The text emphasizes the mix of telephone and transportation and the students can use this to conclude that tele has been added to -portation to make up teleportation, meaning a combination of regular transportation and telecommunication.

Photons

Strategy: Some words are explained in the sentence. The explanation is often between commas (,), dashes (-), or brackets ( ).

The explanation is given in brackets in the text (particles that carry light).

Apart

Strategy: We can use words we already know to guess the meaning of words that mean the same or that have the opposite meaning.

The students are already familiar with the phrase put together and can use this knowledge to conclude that apart means the opposite of together.

3 1 People used to think it was impossible to use machines to talk to each other, but it has become possible with the invention of the telephone. In the future, we may even be able to use machines to send our thoughts to other people.

2 People used to think it was impossible to make a copy of a living thing, but it has become possible with the invention of cloning. In the future, we may even be able to clone human beings.

3 People used to think that it was impossible to make a machine that could do math, but it has become possible with the invention of the abacus and the computer. In the future, we may even be able to use machines that can think.

4. WRITING

Instruction Ask the students to think of inventions that have changed the way we live, e.g. the steam engine, electricity, the telephone, the computer, the Internet etc. What will the next big invention be and how will it change our life? The students are free to come up with their own ideas. Remind the students that they should give the new invention a name, explain (roughly) how it works or what it is, how it will be used (or what it will be used for) and how it will change our life.

Sample writing:

The Thinkuter

I think that the next big thing, the next important invention, will be a computer that can actually think. I don't mean that this computer will be like a human being - it will not be able to come up with its own ideas

but it will be able to help us think. The computers we use today can only do very simple things, like adding and subtracting, or storing and recalling information. The new machine will be able to do things that we do when we think. Since it is a computer that can think, I will call it a thinkuter.

If we have thinkuters, we can do things that used to be impossible. For example, today, with normal computers, only a few very smart people can solve important problems. And even these experts can only solve the problems in the same way. With a thinkuter, we would be able to think in new ways and change the way we understand life, science, and nature. A thinkuter would give us more thinking power and we would be able to do more with our ideas. Everybody has lots of good ideas, even children do, but it is difficult to turn one's ideas into reality. If people had thinkuters, they could use their ideas better - no idea would be wasted.

With thinkuters, we would also need to spend less time in school. We could learn more and faster. School is good for us and we need it, but if we could learn more and faster, we would have more time to do other things that are also important.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Finish all the exercises in this UNIT.

2. Finish the supplementary exercises given by the teacher.

Period 7

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER SUPPLIMENTARY EXERCISES

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

Period 8

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER NEW WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS IN UNIT 2

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

高一英语课件 篇11

1. He sat at the desk, __________ a novel.

A. read B. to read C. reading D. reads

2. If you cheat in the exam, you could hardly _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away C. get away from D. get away with

3. No potatoes for me—I’m _______ a diet.

4. The speed of cars and trucks is _____ to 30 kilometers per hour in large cities in China.

A. limited B. limiting C. limiting to D. limited to

5. Smoking is a bad habit. You should _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away with C. get rid of D. throw

6. I’m really tired _______ Tom. He had me _________ for two hours in the rain.

A. of, waiting B. with; wait C. of; waited D. with; waited

7. Bob ran the 100 meters in 9.91 seconds, and I have not seen ________ this year. (浙江 2005)

A. the best B. better C. the most D. more

8. Filled with anger, he didn’t shout or swear, but just ________ silently at me.

A. looked B. stared C. glared D. glanced

9. — Why was Tom scolded by our teacher? — For ________.

A. tell a lie B. telling lies C. told lies D. telling lie

10. — Anything new in the new regulations? — They will be ________ to us all.

A. of great benefit B. do harms C. do many good D. for the benefit

11. Must I get through the business in one evening? No, you ________.

A. mustn’t B. haven’t C. needn’t to D. don’t have to

12. Your article is too long. You must _______ to about 3000 words.

A. cut it off B. cut it up C. cut it down D. cut it into

13. If your knowledge can be in some way _______ with my experiences, we are sure to succeed.

A. joined B. united C. connected D. combined

14. The news was so ____ that all the people present at the meeting were _______ at it.

A. amazing, amazing B. amazed, amazed C. amazing, amazed D. amazed, amazing

15. You ______be sitting in this waiting room, sir. You see, it is for women and children only.

A. oughtn’t to B. dare not C. need not D. will not

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从1~10各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。

Every person needs water and a diet of healthy foods. These foods should contain some fat, some fiber, a little salt and so on.

People need energy 16 . They eat different kinds of food which change into energy. The energy is 17 in calories. Even when you 18 , you are using energy – about 65 calories an hour. 19 you are at school, or walking home, your body is burning up 100 calories an hour. When playing football or basketball, you 20 be using 400 calories an hour. On Sports Day, during the relay race, you will use most of all, 21 as much as 650 calories an hour.

The Chinese diet is considered to be the healthiest in the world. It contains a lot of fruit and green vegetables. It is 22 in fiber and low in sugar and fat. The Chinese eat less sugar than many other countries in the world. That is 23 lots of people in China have healthy white teeth.

People in the Western world do not eat such healthy foods. They eat 24 fat and sugar and don’t take enough 25 . Because of this, they 26 weight very easily. Their diet contains a lot of fat in the 27 of potato crisps, potato chips, butter, cream and chocolate. They eat a lot of sugar which exist in cakes, soft drinks, 28 and so on. The result is that many of them become fat. 29 some have bad teeth. In some parts of Britain, one person in ten, 30 the age of thirty, has no teeth left.

16. A. for lifeB. to live C. to live withD. for a living

17. A. measuringB. takenC. measuredD. measure

18. A. are asleepB. fall asleepC. go to sleep D. go to bed

20. A. mustB. canC. needD. might

21. A. surelyB. usuallyC. perhapsD. hardly

24. A. much tooB. many tooC. too manyD. too much

25. A. exercisesB. foodC. workD. exercise

26. A. put onB. gain onC. get onD. put up

27. A. typeB. formC. kindD. sort

28. A. sweetsB. sweetC. candy barD. sweet thing

阅读下列短文，从每题所给的'四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。 A．

A car needs gas to run and your body also needs food to work for you. Eating the right kind of food is very important. It can keep your body strong, so take care of what you eat.

There are four main food groups altogether. The dairy products group has food like milk, cheese and sour milk. The other three groups are the meat and fish group, the fruit and vegetable group, and the bread and rice group. Each meal should have at least one food from all the four main groups. With all these food together you will be given enough energy during the day.

It is easy to get into bad eating habits. You may eat your breakfast in a hurry to get to school on time. Or you may not have time for a good lunch. It may seem easy to finish your supper with fish and chips all the time. But you will find yourself tired during these days and you can not think quickly.

Watching what you eat will help keep your body healthy and strong. It is also good to take some exercise. It will help you eat more if you take a walk or play games in the open air. Having a good eating habit with some exercise is the key to your health.

31. Which of the following diets do you think is the best one?

A. Eggs, tomatoes and chicken.B. Milk, bread, cabbages and beef.

C. Corn, fish, cream and pork. D. Rice, beancurd, apples, fish and chicken.

32. Which of the following is a good eating habit?

A. Going to school without any breakfast.B. Eating fish and chips for supper all the time.

C. Finishing your lunch in a very short time.

D. Having at least one food from all the four groups each meal.

33. In this passage the writer mainly tells us that ______.

A. every person needs food to grow wellB. taking exercise can keep your body strong

C. right kind of food with exercise will keep you healthy

D. enough energy helps people think more quickly

B.

Good health is the most valuable thing a person can have, but one cannot take good health for granted. It is important to remember that the body needs proper care in order to be healthy. There are three things that a person can do to help stay in good shape: eat right food ,get enough sleep, and exercise regularly.

Proper nutrition (营养) is important for good health. Your body cannot work well unless it receives the proper kind of “fuel”(燃料).Don't eat too much food with lots of sugar and fat. Eat plenty of foods high in protein (蛋白质) ,like meat, fish, eggs and nuts. Vegetables and fruits are very important because they provide necessary vitamins (维他命) and minerals. However, don't overeat. It is not helpful to be overweight.

Getting the proper amount of sleep is also important. If you don't get enough sleep, you feel tired and easily get angry. You have no energy. Over a long period of time a little a amount of sleep may even result in a change of personality (人的个性).Be sure to allow yourself from seven to nine hours of sleep each night. If you do, your body will feel strong and refreshed, and your mind will be sharp.

Finally, get plenty of exercise. Exercise firms the body, strengthens the muscles, and prevents you from gaining weight. It also improves your heart and lungs. If you follow a regular exercise program, you will probably increase your life-span (寿命).Any kind of exercise is good. Most sports are excellent for keeping the body in good shapes: basketball, swimming, bicycling, running and so on are good examples. Sports are not only good for your body, but they are enjoyable and interesting, too.

If everybody, were to eat the right foods, get plenty of sleep and exercise regularly, the world would be a happier and healthier place. We would all live to be much older and wiser.

34. According to the passage,_________.

B. if we were healthy, we could spend our days in doing things with less sleep

C. one can eat a lot to stay in good shape

D. one needn't take any exercise if he is healthy

35.In order to keep good health, ___________ .

A. we should eat a lot of sweets B. one needs a large amount of fat

C. people should eat according to the foods nutrition D. we must try to sleep now and then

36. Eating more and sleeping less________.

A. can keep healthy B. is no good for you

C. gets you more energy D. will keep your personality

37.The writer explains ________in this passage.

A. how to eat B. the importance of doing exercise

C. how to keep healthy D. what to eat

38.The title of the article should be___________ .

A. Eating and Exercising B. How Vitamins Work in Man's Body

C. Staying Healthy D. Sleeping Well

C.

Isn't it astonishing how much time we spend talking about food? “Have you ever eaten …?” “What did you have for lunch?” and so on. And yet when you travel from one country to another, you will find that people have quite different feelings about food. People often feel that what they eat is normal (正常) and that what other people eat is strange or silly. In most parts of Asia, for example, no meal is complete without rice. In England, people eat potatoes every day. In the Middle East, bread is the main part of every meal. Eating like so many things we do, becomes a habit which is difficult to change. Americans like to drink a lot of orange juice and coffee. The English drink tea four or five times every day. Australians drink a great deal of beer, and the French drink wine every day.

The sort of meat people like to eat also differs from one country to another. Horse meat is thought to be delicious in France. In Hong Kong, some people enjoy eating snakes. New Zealander eat sheep, but they never eat goat meat. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat be-cause of its smell, but they enjoy eating raw fish (生鱼).

So it seems that although eating is a topic we can talk about for hours, there is very little common sense in what we say it. People everywhere enjoy eating what they have always eaten, and there is very little we can do to change our eating habits.

39. Which of the following is true according to the article?

A. All people have the same feeling about food.

B. In most parts of Asia, people usually have rice for meals.

C. People often consider other people to be strange or silly.

D. The topic people spend time talking about is bread and meat.

40. People in different countries .

A. drink the same sort of wineB. have the same eating habit

C. eat different kinds of meatD. have the same tea at different time within a day

41. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat .

A. because they dislike its smellB. because it is too expensive

C. because it is easy to go badD. because they think it will do harm to their health

42. English people drink tea four or five times a day .

A. because they get thirsty easilyB. because there is plenty of tea in Britain

C. because of their drinking habitD. because they have enough time to do so

第一节：根据句子的意思，写出正确的单词，并注意词的正确形式。（共10小题；10分）。

1. He gained all his ________(力量) and was ready for a second try.

2. I patted her _______(温柔地) on the shoulder.

3. It is healthier to keep a b_______ diet every day.

4. This restaurant was not giving its ______(顾客) energy-giving food.

5. ________ (好奇心)drove Wang Pengwei inside Yong Hui’s restaurant.

6. Wang Pengwei stopped worrying and started advertising the _______(好处) of his food.

7. To succeed, we must ___________(结合) talent with working hard.

8. He has been working for a long time, but he is still full of __________.（energetic）

9. You should do some _________(研究) before making the final decision.

10. She is not _________(苗条的)enough to wear these tight trousers.

1. When we are cooking with a gas fire, we ________(can / must) keep the window open.

2. Mr. Joseph has stayed in the US for several years. He _____(may / can) speak English quite well.

3. Jack’s ill, so they ______ (must / have to) change their plans.

4. It _______ (can't / mustn't) be Miss Gao. I know she has gone to Beijing.

5. You say you ________ not do it but I say you ____________ (shall / will)

第三节：根据中文意思完成句子(共5小题；10分)。

1. 我用了一个月才摆脱咳嗽。It took me a month to _____ _____ _____my cough.

2. 她欠我100块钱。 She _______ ________ _______ to me for 100 yuan RMB.

3. 我们应该抛弃考试作弊的坏习惯。We should ________ _________ the bad habit of cheating in the exam.

4.他们没有打架，只是站在那怒视对方。They didn’t fight, but stood there _____ ______ one another.

5．David 靠给报社写文章维生。David ____ _____ ______ by writing articles for newspapers.

高一英语课件 篇12

作者：贺 莉 自：本站原创 点击数：581 文章录入：helen

Teaching plan for SB1A Unit 9 Technology

Teaching goals: Talk about science and technology

Describe things and how they work

Express agreement and disagreement

Use the present Continuous Passive Voice

Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

Write a letter to Q12 about love and friendship

Time arrangement:

Period 1 Warming up, listening, speaking

Period 2 Pre-reading, reading, post-reading

Period 3 Intensive reading

Period 4 Language study

Period 5 Integrating skills

Period 6 Workbook (Talking and Reading)

Period 7 Test

Period one ( listening and speaking )

Warming up

Step I Brainstorming about Technology

1. Is technology important to us? What will you think of when talking about technology?

2. What qualities shall we have if we want to have advanced technology?

( to be creative , good at solving problems and thinking in new ways )

Step II Activity

( Bring the items of a toothpick, plastic bag and left-handed glove if possible)

(Hold a competition of creativity among groups of students if necessary)

1. Students work in groups to solve the problems

2. Compare different solutions and talk about creativity.

Listening

Step I Introduction

1. Describe an everyday object for Ss to guess. (color/ size/ shape/ use etc.)

Step II listening

1. First-listening: what is being described?

2. Second-listening: what can the things be used for?

3. Discussion in pairs: what are the new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses?

Step III A riddle-guessing competition

1. Read the instruction and the guided questions

2 Do a demonstration with a student.

Teacher: You seem to have something in your pocket. What does it look like?

Student: It looks like … ….

T: What is it made of ?

S: It’s made of …….

T: What is it used for ?

S: … … …

3 Ss practice in pairs

4 Competition--- Who can guess it ?

One student thinks of or hides an object in his pocket, while the rest raise questions to guess what it is.

Speaking

Step I Brainstorming

1. Present the situation

2. Brainstorming about the advantages and disadvantages about cellphones

Step II Expressions of agreement and disagreement

Teach new expressions

1) Absolutely= Definitely= Exactly

2) It depends.

3) That’s a good point.

4) That’s worth thinking about.

Step III Activity

1. Ss works in groups and prepare a role play.

2. Ss present their dialogues.

3. Debate: Players from different groups debate the advantages and disadvantages of a cellphone.

Homework: 1. Listening : Workbook P133 Listening Ex 1&2

2. Speaking: Interview your parents the way of life 30 years ago ( Were there telephones , TVs or computers ? )

3. Thinking : P60 Ex 3 Design your cellphone--- to be creative!

Period Two ( extensive reading )

Revision

Check the listening homework on page 133.

Pre-reading

Step I Discussion (Question 2 of Pre-reading )

1. Check the speaking homework of interview

How did people live 30 years ago?

What did people do at night without electricity?

How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life?

2. Talk about the title---Life on the go

Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go---rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using cellphones, computers, etc.

Reading

Step I Presentation

1. Talk about the cellphone and present the new vocabulary.

( Ask Ss to bring cellphones of different brands to class if possible)

Questions: What functions does a cellphone have?

What features does your cellphone have? etc.

Vocabulary: function, feature, image, an electronic calendar, remind ,appointment

2. The top question:

Why are cellphones so popular with teenagers according to the passage?

Step II Reading

1. Skimming for the top question.

2. Some T or F statements to check the general understanding of the passage.

3. Scanning for the main idea of each paragraph, comparing general statement and specific statement. ( Post-reading Ex 2 on Page 60 )

Step III Activity

1. Discussion in pairs ( Post-reading Ex 1 on Page 60 ).

2. Design your own cellphone in groups.

Homework: 1. Read the text after the tape, marking the difficulties.

2. Reading comprehension: WB page 136.

Period Three ( intensive reading )

Revision

Revise the text .

Language points

Vocabulary

1. depend v. dependent adj. independent adj.

1) That depends. = It depends. = I’m not completely sure.

2) depend on 依赖，信任，取决于

e.g. His family depends on him.

We’re depending on you to finish the job by Friday.

Happiness often depends on your attitude to life.

2. add v.

1) 增加， 相加， 补充说

e.g. Add a few more names to the list.

If you add 5 and 3 you get 8.

I should like to add that we are pleased with the result.

2) add to = to increase something

e.g. The rise in electricity costs has added to our difficulties.

3) add up to = amount to

e.g. These numbers add up to 100.

3. remind v.

remind sb to do sth.

of sth.

that –clause

e.g. Remind me to write to Dave.

This hotel reminds me of the one we stayed in last year.

She reminded me that Sue was in Paris.

4. touch n.

get in touch with sb. lose touch with sb.

stay in touch with be in touch with

keep in touch with be out of touch with

5. call v.

call for = to demand sth. , to collect sb.

call at some place = visit some place

call on sb. = to visit sb., to ask sb. to do sth.

call in = to ask sb. to come in{

e.g. Students are calling for more spare time and less homework.

I'll call for you at 8 o'clock.

I think we'd better call in a doctor.

I called on my uncle while I was in London.

6. case n.

in case in this case

in case of + n./pron in any case

in case --clause in no case = never

e.g. The meeting will be put off in case it rains.

In case he arrives before I get back, please ask him to wait.

In case of fire, ring the bell.

I don't think I need any money, but I'll bring some in case.

In no case should we give up dreaming about a better future.

7. need n.

[U] 缺乏； 需要

[C] 需要得东西； 必需品

in need of sth.

no need for sth.

e.g. There’s a growing need for new housing in big cities.

She didn’t earn enough money to satisfy all her needs.

We’re collecting money for children in need.

Please come to me if ever you’re in need of help.

There’s no need for you to say sorry to me.

Sentence patterns

1. Cellphones make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

e.g. I think it necessary for her to stay in touch with her parents .

He found it possible for them to improve the working condition.

Our school makes it a rule for us to have an English Corner every Friday.

2. We have a need to stay in touch with friends no matter where we are or what we are doing.

e.g. Nobody believed him no matter what he said.

No matter where he goes, the thief can’t escape being caught.

She always goes swimming no matter how cold it is.

3. She says that her cellphone helps her do whatever she wants to do.

e.g. Whatever you do, wherever you go, I’ll be right here waiting for you.

She always goes swimming, however cold it is.

Homework: 1. WB page 134-135 Vocabulary Ex1,2,3&4

Period Four ( Language study )

Word study

Step I Page 61 Match the words with their meaning

Step II Check the homework on page 134-135.

Step III Reading for meaning ---guessing the words from the clues.

Page 63 Tips Are you a smart reader?

Grammar

The passive voice (3) --- The Present Continuous Passive Voice

Step I Study the examples

am/ is/ are + being + done

Step II Practice ( page 61 )

Step III Activity

Two students put on a performance of “双簧”.

The door is being pushed open slowly and quietly. A chair is being taken into the room and put at the desk. A piece of paper is being taken out of his pocket. The chair is being cleaned. Now he is sitting down. And some books are being moved to the side of the desk. The schoolbag is being opened, and an English book is being taken out…….

Homework: 1. WB page 136 Grammar 1&2

Period Five ( integrating skills )

Reading

Step I Reading

What is the computer Q12 like ?

How does it control human beings?

What other suggestions will you make to solve the problem?

What will the earth be like if Q12 understands love and friendship?

Step II Language points

1 take over 接管

e.g. The company has been taken over by a American firm.

Sarah will take over my job when I leave.

2 break down （机器）不运转；失败；

break up 结束； （关系）破裂

e.g. The car broke down on the motorway.

The peace talks between the two countries have broken down

The meeting broke up after only half an hour.

Their relationship wasn’t working, so they decided to break up.

3 come up with = to think of or suggest an idea 想出办法，提出建议

e.g. He couldn’t come up with an answer.

How have you come up with such a good idea?

4 success in manage to do sth.

sucessful in

succeed in doing sth. fail to do sth.

e.g. We had no success in finding a new flat.

Jane finally succeeded in passing the her driving test.

Writing

Step I Study the outline of the letter

Step II Students have a discussion in pairs.

Step III Ask a student to give a sample letter orally.

Homework: 1. write a letter to Q12

Period Six ( WB talking and reading )

Talking

WB page 134 Talk about modern technology.

Step I Read the situation

Step II Activity

Ss work in groups

First list the advantages and disadvantages of the inventions of cellphones, robots and computers.

Then Ss have a debate in groups.

Step III Debate

Have 3 debates between groups.

( There are speakers representing each group, and the rest are judges)

Reading

WB page 136 Reading Future travel: teleportation

Step I Fast reading and skimming

What does teleportation mean?

Step II Scanning

How is teleportation different from normal transportation?

Why is it so difficult to teleport human beings?

Step III Reading for words

Match the words with the best strategy on page 137.

Step IV Activity

Discussion : Will teleportation be realized?

Think of more impossible things that may be possible in the future.

一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇

居安思危，思则有备，有备无患。在日常的学习工作中，幼儿园教师都会提前准备一些能用到的资料。资料的定义比较广，可以指生活学习资料。参考资料会让未来的学习或者工作做得更好！所以，你是否知晓幼师资料到底是怎样的形式呢？考虑到你的需要，小编特地编辑了“一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇”，欢迎大家参考阅读。

一只小鸟课件【篇1】

一、导入。

同学们，前几天我们写了一篇描写声音的作文，有许多同学在作文中都描写了同一种声音，是什么声音呢？听！（播放：鸟的叫声）对了，是鸟的叫声。请你再闭上眼睛仔细听听，想象一下这是一幅什么样的画面呢？（生答）

你说的真好，让我们大家有种身临其境的感觉。是啊，鸟儿的叫声多么清脆，多么好听，如果这世界上真的再也听不到鸟儿的叫声，再也看不到鸟儿在林间欢快飞翔的身影，那该是件多么遗憾的事情啊！可是，这样的事却真的发生了！

这节语文课，老师就和同学们一起来读读发生在一只小鸟身上的故事，好吗？（板书：一只小鸟；点课件）

二、初读课文，摸清脉络。

1、 翻开书，自己轻声的读读课文，看看自己是否把字音读准了，把句子读通顺了。

2、 那么文章写了这只小鸟的什么事呢？请同学们听老师来读遍课文，你画出自然段，并试着说说文章写了这只小鸟的什么事好吗？（一只小鸟的故事主要讲了：一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上歌唱，孩子们非常喜欢它，就用弹弓打伤了小鸟，两只老鸟接住小鸟把它带回了巢中。从此孩子们再也没有听到小鸟的歌声。）

3、 那么这是一篇叙事的文章，是按照事情的发展顺序来描写的。也就是说先写了事情的起因（板书），再写经过（板书），最后写结果（板书）。那么我们来看看这篇文章哪几个自然段写了1、这就是事情的起因，哪几个自然段写了2、这就是事情的经过，哪几个自然段写了3呢，这就是事情的结果？

三、品读细想，模仿想象。

1、弄清了课文的主要内容，我们也不得不接受了这样一个残酷的现实：那就是一只可爱的小鸟被人打伤了！是谁造成了这样的悲剧？原因又是什么呢？好心的同学们你们能在文中找到答案吗？（回答）你从哪看出来孩子们非常的喜爱这只小鸟呢？

2、让这么多的孩子都很喜爱的是一只什么样的小鸟呢？请大家在小组里读读第一和第二自然段，用笔画一画，再和同学说一说。一会再告诉大家行吗？

3、谁愿意读读第一和第二自然段呢？（生答）师：这真是一只快乐可爱的小鸟啊！

4、哪位同学能想象一下小鸟快乐的心情，到前面来表演一下这只可爱的小鸟呢？其他的同学和周老师都把自己当做自然中的一棵树或是一朵花，让我们用肢体来配合他一下，让我们含笑着倾听她美妙动听的歌声吧！

5、这么可爱的小鸟谁不喜欢呢？可是，不幸的事情还是发生了！一个弹子飞来，打伤了小鸟，当时的情况是怎么样的？谁能给大家读读？其他同学想想在这一部分你读明白了什么呢？

6、哪一位父母不爱自己的孩子，哪一位父母能眼睁睁的看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的他们心急如焚、此时的他们肝肠寸断。我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时的那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？同学们试试。

7、那么刚才还活蹦乱跳的小鸟呢？他怎么样了？你觉得这只小鸟怎么样？（太可怜了）我们看了心也会碎的！你能试着读读这一句吗？

8、这是一幅怎样的画面啊？一对悲伤焦急的父母含着眼泪望着自己受伤的孩子，孩子正痛苦的流着血。孩子们啊，我们怎么可以？怎么可以？让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到伤害呢？让我们齐读课文的最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

四、拓展延伸、情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里你明白了什么？你想到了什么？能不能跟大家说说？如果让你跟那些打小鸟的孩子们说两句话，你会跟他们说什么？

2、光悔恨是没有用的，我们还必须用我们的实际行动去帮助小鸟，我们应该怎么做呢？请同学们看这个动画片，然后再说说。

3、教师激情结语，引出请爱护鸟类和人类共同的家园地球主题升华。

一只小鸟课件【篇2】

教学目标

1.通过学习使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2.初步练习读懂每个自然段的意思。

3.继续学习抓重点词语边读边想。

教具：投影仪 学生准备剪纸鸟

教学过程

师：上节课我们已经读熟了课文，说说课文写了小鸟什么事？

师：大家翻开书自己读课文。你觉得这是一只怎样的小鸟？联系有关语句说一说。

生：这是一只快乐的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？

生：读书

师：从哪些词感觉到快乐？（啁 啾…）你们能把他们这种快乐通过朗读表现出来吗？

生：这是一只可爱的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？……

师：选自己最喜欢的一句话读给同桌听一听，互相评一评

师：多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，咱们怀着美好的心情读一读第二自然段。（齐读）

师：鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌，有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

师：默读5、6段，读到自己感受很深的句子就画下来，还可以把自己的感受用几个词语概括地写在句子旁边。交流体会（多找几个学生谈），教师投影出示有关句子，指导朗读。

（1）它正要发声，忽然“啪”的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

（2）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

师：你怎样评价树下的那几个孩子？

师：在我们身边，还有哪些不爱护鸟类的行为？

师：读了《一只小鸟》的故事，你有什么话想对小鸟或者孩子说？请同学们拿出你们自己剪的小鸟，把想说的话写在上面。

生：汇报、交流。

师：同学们，美丽的鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱，不是占有、不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。让我们怀着美好的心情再次朗读课文。

下课。

板书：

快乐 可爱

6、一只小鸟 让世界更加美丽

受到伤害

一只小鸟课件【篇3】

教学要求：

1、通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

2、可结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象。

教学重点难点：

通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

教学时间：两课时

教学准备：挂图、小黑板

教学过程：

第一课时

一、揭示课题

学习了《翠鸟》这篇课文后，同学们对小鸟产生了更加深厚的喜爱之情，如果你发现树上有一只可爱的小鸟，它的妈妈正好出去觅食了，你会怎样做呢？

揭示《一只小鸟》

二、感知课文

1、自由读课文，想想课文讲了一件什么事？

2、小鸟、老鸟、小朋友分别给你留下了什么印象？

三、学习字词

1、同桌合作，读通课文。主要把生字和生僻字读准。

2、抽学生分别读课文8个自然段，并说说每段主要写了什么？

（注意抓住要点：谁或什么在哪儿或什么时间干什么）

3、认读生字词，读准：

zhīmǎnmqīngdndiēyǎng

树枝丰满觅食倾听掸子跌了下来仰望

cholingxinxzhōujiū

鸟巢翎毛衔着缝隙啁啾

多音字：弹dn（子弹）tn弹琴

4、注意字形：觅字的爪字头的写法

仰字没有一撇

5、学生记住字形，当场听写。

6、给生字组词。

四、练习巩固：

抄写生字词

朗读课文

第二课时

一、读课题，导入新课

二、你认为这是一直怎样的小鸟？为什么？

1、读课文一、二自然段，学生讨论

2、交流反馈：

一只幼小的小鸟：它的羽毛还未丰满，不能远飞，每天只能在巢里啁啾。

一只快乐的有父母保护的小鸟：和两只老鸟说着话儿，她们都觉得非常快乐。

一只可爱的小鸟：它的脑袋里忽然充满了新意，抖刷抖刷翎毛，飞到树枝上，放出那赞美自然的歌声来。

3、练习朗读读出小鸟的可爱和快乐，读出画面的和谐美。

三、鸟妈妈、鸟爸爸给你留下了怎样的印象？

1、读课文3-6自然段，讨论以上问题。

2、抓住重点句理解：斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

四、孩子们给你留下了什么印象？从哪里看出来的？

体会孩子们喜爱小鸟但又伤害了小鸟的行为。

读课文7、8自然段，想象：小鸟消失后，孩子们的心情怎样/他们会怎么想？

（使学生明白什么样的行为才是真正的喜爱。）

过了十年，一切有了什么变化？

五、回读课文，升华情感

有感情地读课文，说说自己读完课文后的感想。

六、想象练说

那只小鸟后来怎样了？同桌互相练说，然后抽学生上台说。

一只小鸟课件【篇4】

活动目标：

1.了解小鸟的特征，学习波浪形折纸。

2.能运用剪，贴，折等的技能进行创作。

3.感受创作的乐趣，体验成功的喜悦。

4.培养幼儿的观察、操作、表达能力，提高幼儿的审美情趣及创新意识。

5.培养幼儿耐心完成任务的习惯，享受折纸活动的乐趣。

活动准备：

1.彩纸2.剪刀3.双面胶4.铅笔，直尺，橡皮。5.勾线笔 6.录像设备7.音乐

活动过程：

一.开始部分：

导入：

1.师：“今天教大家来制作一只小小鸟，那怎么做呢?”

2.介绍制作材料和工具。

二.中间环节：

示范制作步骤：

1.拿一张彩纸，把彩纸剪成一条长方形。

2.反复对折，折成波浪形状。

3.中间对折一下，然后用剪刀把两边对角剪掉。

4.再剪一条长方形，重复2，3步骤

5.把两个剪好的折纸用双面胶粘在一起，打开折纸呈花朵形状。

6.分别画好小鸟的尾巴，眼睛，翅膀，嘴巴，然后剪下来粘贴。

三.结束部分

播放音乐，制作背景，呈现完成的小鸟结束此活动。

活动反思

本次微课我利用了最普遍最常用的手工折纸来进行教学，小鸟是幼儿在生活中最常见的动物，对于幼儿来说并不陌生。为了更好地呈现，我通过手机拍摄，制作步骤分解，并进行示范讲解，给幼儿一目了然的视觉效果。为了不让幼儿在观看时感到无聊生硬，我为视频加入了愉悦的背景音乐来给整个活动增添一丝生趣，微课录完后我觉得我有些地方只注重制作步骤，在活动导入部分过渡的有些仓促，在今后的微课教学中我会多加注意，注重每个细节。

一只小鸟课件【篇5】

一、说教材

《一只小鸟》是北师大版三年级上册《鸟儿》单元中的一篇主体课文，这篇课文，出自文学名匠冰心之手，语言清新流畅，是一篇非常优美的散文。文章主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌，被孩子们打中后两只老鸟把它接住并带回巢中的事。文章以爱为主旋律，歌颂了亲情的伟大；批评了不成熟的儿童爱，因爱的方式不对，给鸟儿带来了伤害；告诉我们生命是平等的，人与自然之间应该是和谐的，我们人类应该爱护自然、保护自然，应该有一颗真诚的爱心。教育孩子们对于世间一切美好的事物，不仅要爱，而且要会爱，爱不是自私地占有，不是无情地伤害，而是欣赏、呵护和无私的奉献。

二、说教学目标、重难点、教学目标：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

教学重点、难点：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

三、说教学方法

学生升入三年级后，已经掌握了一定的观察想象、口头表达、交流合作、朗读等方面的能力，但是这些方面的能力都不强，比较薄弱，比如观察不细致，不能进行充分的合作交流，口头表达方面说话不够流利、完整、通顺，朗读水平不高等等这些能力都有待于老师在今后的教学中不断地培养，不断提高。针对学生的现状又结合教材的特点我设计了通过运用朗读法、小组合作交流法、图文结合法、理解重点词句法来进行本课的教学，并对学生各方面的能力进行进一步的培养和锻炼。

四、说教学过程

《小学语文教学法原理》告诉我们，语文教学中的阅读，是关系到培养读写能力和发展智力的一种发展性阅读。读一篇文章，先要让学生感知文字，从字词到句，从句子到段落，从段落到全篇，逐步读懂。结合《一只小鸟》一文的具体情况，在教学中的具体操作程序是这样安排的：

一、激趣导入

因本节课是第二课时的学习，一开始我便以昨天我们认识了一只小鸟朋友，今天它又来到了我们的课堂，大家还想继续了解它吗？导语导入，（通过小鸟朋友这样亲切的叫法，拉近学生与小鸟的距离，激发学生的学习兴趣）

复习，检查字词的掌握情况。

谁能说说课文主要讲了一件什么事？（检查学生对课文主要内容的掌握情况，锻炼学生的口头表达能力。）

二、细读课文，体会感悟

新课标要求，理解课文要以读为主，读中感悟，读中体会，俗话说读书百遍，其义自现。第一部分的学习我设计运用朗读、小组合作探究等教学方法突破重点。我设计围绕这是一只怎样的小鸟？你是从哪些地方看出来的？这个问题，从问题入手，让学生带着问题静心潜读课文，与鸟儿作心灵的吟唱，通过小组讨论学习，让学生充分发挥学习积极性，学会合作，学会探究，在愉快的交流过程中学会知识，再经过全班交流，学生对鸟儿的外形、活动、叫声应该已经有了一定的了解，鸟儿那机灵可爱的样子便会跃然纸上。如此可爱快乐的小鸟，我们应该怎样读才能体现出它的快乐呢？此时趁机指导学生有感情地朗读，让学生在读中感悟小鸟的可爱快乐，通过学生自由练读、指名读、生评读、老师适时的激发、导读，我想学生应该可以读得活、读出韵味。此时又我设计了同学们对第一部分的学生还有什么不懂或不明白的地方吗？这样一个质疑的环节，一方面可以训练学生提出问题、解决问题的能力，让学生学会质疑；另一方面可以点出重点，如啁啾是个生僻字（形容鸟儿的叫声）；有些学生可能不太理解，可以让学生帮助解答；再如自然在这里指大自然，不仅要让学生明白大自然除了有灿烂的阳光，葱绿的树木等等，还应该引导学生感受到因为有了小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，大自然的这种和谐的美才能够展现得更加淋漓尽致。这样一来，也就为解释鸟类是我们人类的朋友，我们应该爱护它们找到了依据。最后我又设计以学生用肢体语言表现小鸟快乐可爱的形象及欣赏关于小鸟的图片、叫声的环节把学生对小鸟的快乐、可爱的理解推向高潮。

第二部分（36）是文章的重点，这一部分的学习，我设计了抓住重点词句，理解课文内容学习方法突破重难点。如这句它正要发声，忽然啪的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去忽然说明了什么？(意料之外)跌是什么意思为什么不用掉？（跌说明完全失去控制，很重的掉下来，说明鸟儿受伤很重）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。斜刺里不好理解，让学生通过观察画面，仔细观察图中两只老鸟的动作，通过适当的动作或手势从而理解斜刺里，加深学生对内容的理解，激发学生表达的欲望，有效地锻炼学生的观察能力和语言表达能力。箭也似的说明像箭一样速度飞快；另外通过飞来、接住、衔上一系列动词体现出老鸟救子的急切心情；它的血从树隙里一滴一滴地落到地上来。一滴一滴说明什么？（学生只要理解小鸟流血过多，受伤严重）刚才还活蹦乱跳的雏鸟就这样受伤，就这样失去了生机、清脆的叫声甚至也许是生命。此时孩子的情感从高峰跌入谷底，他们为小鸟的不幸而悲愤，自然而然地达到了共鸣：爱不能成为一种伤害，爱应该是欣赏、呵护和奉献。通过对斜刺里箭也似的一滴一滴等重点词语的理解，加之教师适时的指导朗读，学生自由练读、指名读等有效地、充分地朗读，我觉得学生应该能体会亲情的伟大。

三、想象拓展

三年级的学生已具有一定的观察想像、口头表达和交流合作的学习能力，因此我安排了让学生想象：（1）故事讲到这里，你想对谁说些什么呢？(对小鸟、对鸟爸爸、鸟妈妈、或对孩子们、对人类)这个环节的设计我让学生把肚子里的话都倒出来放心大胆地说出来，锻炼学生口头表达能力的同时考察学生对文章内容的感悟，使学生的情感得到升华。(2)消失的歌声又再次出现了，这是怎么回事？设计续编故事这样的环节，进一步的培养锻炼学生的想象能力以及口头表达能力。

五、作业设计

我本着让学生自由作业，快乐学习的目的设计了三项选作题：

1、续写故事：后来，消失的歌声又出现了，这是怎么回事呢？

2、登陆网站了解更多关于鸟类的知识；

3、设计并制作标语牌，写上你创作的保护鸟儿的标语。

六、板书设计

好的板书是一篇文章的袖珍版，是课文精华的体现；好的板书更应具有深刻的启发性。我的板书设计力求体现这些，设计时按照故事的发展顺序，体现了文章的思路，从板书中可以发现抓住重点、突破难点的途径，并能用较为清晰的思路引导学生复述课文内容。（出示板书设计图）

语文应该是广阔的，字词的积累，文章的品析，情感的升华都应是语文的内涵。而生活这片广阔的天地更应是语文的外延。教育的最高境界应该是达到三个和谐，即让孩子与自身和谐，与周围生命和谐，与大自然和谐。教学本文，除学习语文基础知识（写字、朗读、表达）之外，更多的应该让孩子懂得对生命的敬畏：真正的的喜爱是对鸟儿的疼惜、照顾和爱护、鸟儿只有是活的才是最可爱的。所以应该让孩子们学会真正的爱的方式。

一只小鸟课件【篇6】

原创原因：一只小鸟飞在春天的田野里，开心的唱着歌，快乐的自由自在。通过本次幼儿园教案，激发孩子在生活中养成良好的卫生习惯，养成良好的习惯健康自己的身体。引发撕纸在教学中的乐趣。

目标：引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”，培养幼儿的动手能力和耐心细致的习惯，初步学习撕纸的技能，练习撕圆，养成良好的卫生习惯。

准备：手工纸人手两份：一大二小、16K纸、记号笔、音乐

难点：撕圆

重点：培养动手能力

过程：

一、谈话：

1、关于“禽流感”

2、引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”

3、导入：

小鸟：现在，由于“禽流感”人们都不欢迎我们了，我们感到很寂寞。

老师：我们请这些健康的小鸟来和我们一起玩，好吗？

二、撕小鸟

1、教师示范讲解，

幼儿跟学

X（1）撕小鸟：

身体：将大正方形纸的四个角都撕去——将光边撕去——慢慢撕成一个圆形。翅膀：用小正方形撕

（2）用记号笔添加嘴、脚

2、幼儿练习撕小鸟的好朋友（再撕一只小鸟，并添加嘴、脚）

三、添画背景

可以用撕下来的碎纸，也可以用记号笔。

四、听音乐学小鸟飞

（与小鸟一同游戏）

优秀教案推荐

又一只快乐的小鸟

活动目标：体验创造的快乐，在感受理解音乐的基础上，用不同动作表现音乐情境。

活动准备：表现小鸟生活的三段体音乐、录音机

活动过程：

1．我们和小鸟做了朋友高兴吗？下面我们再来听一首关于小鸟的音乐，听了以后，你觉得小鸟在干什么？

提问：你觉得小鸟在做什么？

2．让我们再来仔细地听听这首音乐有几段？每一段听上去是一样的吗？

提问：你听出来有几段？每一段是怎么样？

3．让我们来听听第一段的音乐速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？

听后提问：这段音乐的速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？（XX小朋友说得很好，你做给小朋友看看，大家来学学）

4．小鸟醒来后，觉得很轻松，我们一边来听一边来想一想，它还会做些什么？

听后提问：小鸟醒来后会做些什么？

我们一起来跟着音乐做小鸟捉虫、游戏的动作。

5．小鸟们玩了一天很累了，要回家休息了，我们来听听小鸟是怎么回家的？

提问：小鸟是怎么回家的？是怎样休息的？（幼儿听着音乐做小鸟回家、小鸟休息的动作）

你们想不想成为一只小鸟，让我们来做一只快乐的小鸟吧！跟着音乐飞吧！我们跟着音乐把你好看的动作表演给客人老师看吧！（幼儿自由表演）

一只小鸟课件【篇7】

学情分析：

本班学生共有60人，大部分来自农村或外来务工人员子女。三年级的学生，已初步形成了良好的学习习惯和学习方法，上课能专心听老师上课，认真做课堂笔记。有一部分学生还缺乏良好的学习习惯和正确的学习态度，对学习没有良好的认识，缺乏积极的学习态度，学习存在着惰性，喜欢依赖老师和家长，不是主动的去获取知识，靠的还是死记硬背。

教材分析：

本篇课文《一只小鸟》是北师大版小学语文三年级上册(五册)中第五单元的第二篇主体课文。本文的作者是冰心。文中主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌、孩子们用弹弓大中了小鸟，两只老鸟接住了小鸟把它带回巢中。从此孩子们再也听不到小鸟的叫声。文章批评了不爱护鸟类的行为，歌颂了亲情的伟大。

教学目标：

1、学习本课生字新词，理解课文内容。

2、正确流利地朗读课文，学习总结课文内容，并结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、按照指定意思为课文划分层次。

4、继续学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学重点：学习总结课文内容，学习概括每一自然段的大意，学习为课文划分层次。

教学难点：学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学准备：多媒体教学光盘自制ppt课件

教学课时：一课时

教学过程：

一、导入。

1、同学们，你们喜欢鸟儿吗？你最喜欢什么鸟儿？

2、鸟儿是人类的朋友，它们和人类的生活息息相关。我们的世界因为有了鸟儿的存在显得生机勃勃，因为有了鸟儿的存在显得绚丽多彩。今天，让我们再次走进《一只小鸟》一课，共同关注一只小鸟的命运。

3、生齐读课题。

二、学习课文1、2自然段。

1、通过上节课的学习，大家对课文有了大致的了解，相信文中的一只小鸟给大家留下了一定的印象，下面请同学们自学课文1、2自然段。

出示自学提示：

用自己喜欢的方式再读读课文1、2自然段，思考：这是一只（）的小鸟。

2、交流汇报

这是一只可爱的、幼小的、快乐的、幸福的、爱唱歌、歌声动听的、爱欣赏风景的小鸟。

你从哪些词句中看出来？

3、多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，再加上小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，这是一副多么美丽、和谐的自然图画啊！让我们怀着美好的心情齐读课文1、2自然段。

三、学习课文3--6自然段。

鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌。可是有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

1、请同学们快速默读课文3至6自然段，画出自己感受最深的句子，并在旁边批注自己的体会或感受。

2、汇报交流。

（ 1）它正要发声，忽然"啪"的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

从这句话看出小鸟的伤势很严重，"跌"是完全失去控制，很重地摔下来。抓住重点词指导朗读。

（ 2）斜刺里两老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

从这句话能够看出老鸟对小鸟非常关爱，体会到亲情的伟大。"箭也似的"像箭一样快，说明它们此时此刻内心非常着急。抓住"箭也似的"指导朗读。

师：拿一位母亲不爱自己的孩子？哪一位母亲能眼睁睁地看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的它们心急如焚，此时的它们肝肠寸断，我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？

自己试读，指名读，评议，齐读。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

从这句话体会到小鸟的伤势很重可能有生命危险……

师：刚才还活蹦乱跳、高声鸣唱的小鸟转眼间正痛苦地流着血，正面临着死亡的威胁，你觉得此时是一只怎样的小鸟？（可怜的、不幸的、痛苦的、命运悲惨的……）

是啊！这是多么令人心痛的一幕啊！你能带着这种感受读好这句话吗？

试读，指名读，齐读。

五、学习课文7、8自然段。

1、此时此刻，假如你就是那些孩子中的一员，当你看见小的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来，它的生命即将结束，你会怎么想？

指名说。

2、因为孩子的一时贪玩，让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到了伤害，让我们齐读最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

3、文中的孩子们喜欢这只鸟吗？从什么地方可以看出？他们对小鸟的爱和老鸟对小鸟的爱有什么不同？

点生汇报。

师：小孩的爱是自私的，爱的方式不对，爱它就让它更加自由，爱它就应该让它更加快乐，爱它就让它更加美丽，爱不是占有。

六、拓展延伸，情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里，你明白了什么？如果让你对文中的孩子说几句话，你会说些什么？

2、师：听了你们这番话，相信那些调皮的孩子们会放下手中的弹弓，以一颗善心和爱心去对待鸟类。老师也想对文中的孩子们说几句话，可以吗？

出示白居易的《鸟》诗。

谁道群生性命微，一般骨肉一般皮。

劝君莫打枝头鸟，子在巢中望母归。

岂止是"子在巢中望母归",同样还有"母在巢中盼子归",古人尚且明白这个道理，何况我们今天的少年儿童呢？让我们一起读一读这首诗，向所有的人发出"莫打枝头鸟"呼声吧！

七、总结。

美丽鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱不是占有，不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。我们相信：只要人人都献出一点爱，世界将变成美好的人间

作业：每一只美丽的小鸟都对世界充满了幻想和希望，但文中的这只小鸟却怎么也没有想由于人类的贪婪使它惨遭不幸。小鸟的命运牵动着每个人的心，大家想像一下，那只小鸟后来怎么样了？续写一段话。

教学资源：

为了更合理的、恰当的用好多媒体资源，有效的服务于教学活动，真正的起到辅助作用，在本节课设计之后，我广搜资源，分别从网络上、远教资源库上、多媒体教学光盘上大量的参考整理，最后一句我本节课的教学目标、重点难点，最终选用了多媒体教学光盘和自制的幻灯片课件。光盘中我选用了词语的出示和第一部分的动画播放，这两个部分能较好的突破本节课的难点，并激发学生参与学习的积极性。自制课件我为了更好的指导学生学会总结段意和划分层次，就用课件为他们展示出了一些学法指导，学生在自读课文的时候，可以参考学习，减轻学生的学习压力，起到了引导与自学的作用。

一只小鸟课件【篇8】

活动目标：

1．学习童谣，感受数字童谣的特点。

2．尝试正确使用量词，并根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，体验创编童谣的乐趣。

活动准备：

1．每人一个贴绒动物(小鸟、喜鹊、麻雀、青蛙、鸭子、蛤蟆、小猪、河马、小马、毛驴等)。

2．与童谣内容有关的一定数量的动物卡片一套。

活动过程：

1．感受童谣内容。

(1)自由地向同伴介绍自选的贴绒小动物，并用声音或动作表示动物的主要特征。

(2)集体讨论各种动物的叫声或走路的动作。

★指导语：你的动物朋友是谁？它是怎样唱歌、走路的？

2．学习童谣。

(1)根据动物的数量顺序学习童谣，正确使用量词。

★指导语：这里有哪些小动物？各有多少？

(2)出示娃娃的图片，学习童谣最后两句。

★指导语：小朋友高兴的时候会怎么样？

(3)幼儿边做动作边念童谣。

3．尝试根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，正确使用量词。

一只小鸟课件【篇9】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视；交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

一只小鸟课件【篇10】

一、教材分析：

此课是在《鸟和家禽》、《鸟的纹样》、《水墨画鸟》、《我做的鸟和家禽》基础上的一堂“综合、探索”课。像一只小鸟在天空中自由翱翔，是每个孩子的梦想。本课抓住学生这一心理，利用生活中废弃的材料，从色彩、造型、巧妙的搭配入手，创意性地把自己装扮成一只小小鸟，从而完成教学任务。

本课是在"变废为宝、变废为美"的美术教学新观念下一次革新性的创作会活动。

二、教学目标：

(1)认知目标:进一步了解鸟的外形特征，培养学生的造型概括能力。

(2操作目标:能综合多种废旧材料设计和制作鸟的形象。

(3)情感目标:激发学生热爱大自然、关爱小动物的情感，体验游戏带来的快乐，感受自己制作作品的美及成功的喜悦。

三、教学重难点：

教学重点:如何有选择地利用一定的废旧材料把自己装扮成一只鸟。

教学难点:能够综合废旧材料进行组合创作，造型美观、别致。

四、教学准备：

师生共同准备:a．各种废旧材料(瓶、罐、纸箱、纸板等)。

b 手工制作工具(剪刀、胶水、双面胶、订书机、胶棒等)。

c 各种绘画工具(颜料、画笔、调色盒等)，以及抹布等整理收拾工具。

五、教学过程：

利用前两节课中有关鸟的创作作品，来说说鸟的形象特征。

将师生共同准备的废旧材料，分放于教室四周，根据自己带的材料，学生介绍自已的创作意图。

以小组为单位，根据部分学生的创作意图，讨论设计方案的可行性。

讨论问题:

1 制作的成品是否安全?

2 色彩搭配是否吸引h?

3 如何合理利用不同质地的废旧材料来制作鸟的各个部分?

欣赏:

l 一组有关鸟类的卡通真人秀造型，从色彩、造型等方面引导学生观察。

2 历届学生的鸟类化装造型图片或书本上学生的学习活动图片。

教师以鸟的其一部分进行示范制作，也可以让学生参与制作，共同完成。

作业设计:以小组为单位，设计制作一件以鸟为主题的造型作品。

巡回指导:

l 及时协调学生的合作意识。

2 重点指导部分学生的细节制作。

3 友情提醒:注意美工刀的安全使用，注意胶棒的正确使用。

4 提供有关鸟的图片，协助学生搞好创作。

展示活动:在教室中央，搭建"舞台"，进行鸟的真人秀表演，在座的学生组成"小小评讲团"，进行评议(根据色彩、造型、表演等方面)。

一只小鸟课件【篇11】

活动目标：

1、 培养幼儿热爱大自然，爱护小动物的情感。

2、 理解儿歌内容，学习仿编诗歌。

3、 学习词汇“飞飞，刨刨、跳跳、游游、跑跑、笑笑”

活动准备：

字卡、小动物图片、儿歌录音带

活动过程：

1、随着活泼快乐的音乐，教师带领幼儿跳舞进入教室。

2、今天天气真好，我们班上也来了许多小动物。v教师把小动物图片贴于黑板上，供幼儿观察w

一、观察图片，理解儿歌

1、图片有哪些小动物？v根据幼儿回答，教师翻字卡,认识字宝宝w

识字游戏：请幼儿给小动物们找到的正确的名字，将字宝宝贴在相对应的动物图片上。

2、 小动物们都在干什么？请小朋友们学一学？

3、 小动物们还有一首儿歌，让我们听一听v听的过程中，教 师指图提示w

4、 你听到了谁？在做什么？都学谁？

5、 一起跟录音表演儿歌。

二、引导幼儿仿编诗歌

1、你还知道哪些小动物？

2、你们可以跟它学什么？

3、你能用和诗里一样的话说出来吗？

三、集体把自己编的儿歌表演一遍。

结束：教师带领幼儿学小鸟自由的飞向大自然。

一只小鸟课件【篇12】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视;交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

教学设计意图

本文讲述的故事和学生生活十分贴近，可唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，又是一篇进行口语交际的好材料，本课没有难理解的词，因此，我把教学重点放在第三至八自然段，通过反复的朗读，表演课文，巧设情境，激发学生说话兴趣，从而懂得爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。培养学生的形象思维能力和创造力，提高每个学生的口语交际能力。